Sie sind auf Seite 1von 522

Technical

Publications

2202119
Revision 17

CT HiSpeed Series
Advanced Diagnostics

Copyrighte 1998–2003 by General Electric Company

Advanced Service Documentation


Property of GE
For GE Service Personnel Only
No Rights Licensed – Do Not Use or Copy
Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 0 2202119

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.


WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.


AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN


ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.


AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.

a
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 0 2202119

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA


DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE


SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

b
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 0 2202119

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION


X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should
be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this
equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT


All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.

In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

c
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 0 2202119

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.

Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.

Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.

CAUTION

Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.

Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.

Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients and other people who may be
around this equipment to fully comply with the above regulation.

d
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Tab – Section Page REV Error Message 4–1 to 4–53 15

– Title page 17 4 (DAS/Detector) i 9


Title page rear blank
Channel – Ring Radius Table 1–1 to 1–20 16
(Warning and other impor- a to d 0
LED Description 2–1 5
tant information)
5 (X–ray Generator) i to ii 16
(Revision Information) A to C 17
LED Description 1–1 to 1–11 11
(System Notation (NP, i 11
NP+, ...) Errors, Diagnostics & 2–1 to 2–40 16
Troubleshooting (NP, NP+, NP+
1 (System) i to iii 17 Twin)

Service Menu 1–1 to 1–92 17 Errors, Diagnostics & 3–1 to 3–45 16


Troubleshooting (NP++, NP++
Message Display 2–1 to 2–5 10 Twin)

Unix Commands 3–1 to 3–13 15 Errors, Diagnostics & 4–1 to 4–47 16


Troubleshooting (for p5.4 or later
Irix Guide 4–1 to 4–10 11 JEDI Software)

Software Structure 5–1 to 5–6 5 6 (PDU) i 14

Troubleshooting 6–1 to 6–15 17 LED Description (for PDU2) 1–1 to 1–2 14


Ring Value Measurement 7–1 to 7–2 11 i 5
7 (Functional Diagram)
2 (Operator Console) i 15
Emergency 1–1 5
LED Description 1–1 to 1–33 10 Safety Loop 2–1 5
Test Programs 2–1 to 2–18 11
Gantry Rotation 3–1 5
Host Processor Troubleshooting 3–1 to 3–11 17
Tilt FWD/BWD 4–1 5
NPR (Recon Engine) 4–1 to 4–19 15
Troubleshooting Cradle In/Out 5–1 5

3 (Table/Gantry) i 15 IMS In/Out 6–1 5

LED Description 1–1 to 1–9 10 Table Up/Down 7–1 5

Power–on Test 2–1 to 2–5 1 Auto Voice 8–1 5

Off–line Test 3–1 to 3–6 12 – Blank/Rear cover –

A
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change
17 12/11/02 System Corrected the calculation for mA smudge (Sec. 1).
Added a troubleshooting tip for DICOM/Network (CQA10111730) (Sec. 6).

OC Added : RTC Battery Troubleshoot (sec3)

Table/Gantry –

DAS/Detector –

X–ray Generator –

PDU –

Functional Diagram –

16 7/01/02 System Corrected: Service menu for V6 (Sec 1)


Added: Image Database troubleshooting (sec 6)

DAS/Detector Added: Channel No. table for Twin (sec 1)

X–ray Generator Added: 0402H error information (sec 2)


Updated: 70–0501H error code (DC bus out of range). (Sec. 2, 3, 4)

15 4/15/02 System Updated: Twin information for IQ scan (Sec. 1).


Added: enableCorrection command (Sec. 3).

OC NPR troubleshooting revised (Sec. 4).

Table/Gantry Corrected the applicable system version information for error messages (Sec. 4).

14 12/21/01 PDU Added this new tab (PDU).

13 8/22/01 System Updated: Service Tool For V/R 6 (Sec. 1) and Unix Commands (Sec. 3).

Table/Gantry Updated the error message information for V/R 6 (Sec. 4).

X–ray Generator Added explanations to 30–0324H error (Sec. 3).

12 4/18/01 System Updated: For V/R 5.5 (sec 1)


Added: SnapState option, TubeTempMax, history log (sec3)

Table/Gantry Added a new TGP board part No. (Sec. 3).

11 12/08/00 System Colored: Sec. 1, 4.


Added the section ‘Ring Value Measurement’ (Sec. 7).

Operator Console Colored: Sec. 2, 3.

Table/Gantry Colored: Sec. 3.

X–ray Generator Colored: Sec. 1.


Updated the descriptions–which section is applicable to which systems (Sec. 2, 3, 4).

B
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

REVISION HISTORY (continued)


REV Date Primary Reason for Change
10 8/31/00 System Changed: The stationary scan parameter during aperture Z–axis zigzag motion (Sec. 1–tube pro-
cedure(change)).
Added (within Sec. 1): View log file note on GSA, Scan Analysis – Z–Axis Tracking, A note for
Raw Data Functions, Z–axis collimation diagnostics.
Adopted the new revision control for Sec. 2, 3, 4.

Operator Console Added: New DASM information (DASM II–VDB (2191523–3), DASM II–LCAM (2191524–2)) (Sec.
1), Other error message information to IDE tests (Sec. 3), NPR (Recon Engine) Troubleshooting
(Sec. 4).
Adopted the new revision control for Sec. 2.

Table/Gantry Adopted the new revision control for Sec. 1, 3.

DAS/Detector Added the cross reference tables for Twin systems (Sec. 1).

X–ray Generator Adopted the new revision control for Sec. 2, 3, 4.

9 6/02/00 – Added Twin system related information.

8 4/20/00 – JEDI p5.4 software.

7 2/25/00 – Tube spits log description; Host Processor Troubleshooting, System menu.

6 12/17/99 – Corrected some Service Menu descriptions; Service Tool for V/R 4.1; Corrected some of the XG
diagnostic procedures.

5 10/19/99 – Added Software Structure diagram/descriptions; Corrected pin numbers in Ring Radius Charts;
Corrected/Added LED descriptions; Added Power–on Test descriptions; Added NP++ XG diag-
nostics.

4 4/22/99 – Added Unix command information to the System tab.

3 2/25/99 – Service Menu – Automated DAS Linearity Test, Detector Channel Information, MTF Survey, TGP
off–line test, Jedi V4.0 software.

2 10/29/98 – Service Menu – XG Test – Error log retrieve (Jedi).

1 7/23/98 – MTF Survey, OC H/W diag test time, LED descriptions for TGP and OGP, TGP Power–on tests
and off–line tests, OGP power–on tests and error messages, XG Diagnostics, Functional Inter-
connection Diagrams.

0 4/09/98 – Initial release.

C
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

D
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

SYSTEM NOTATION (NP, NP+, ...)

Hardware Constitution of NP, NP+, NP++, and Twin


According to system models or customer options installed on the system, a number of system specifications or func-
tions available may differ from system to system; such are:

D Selectable scan times, MA values, FOV dimensions

D ‘Remote Tilt’ function

D Number of arrays of DAS/detector units, i.e., single or twin DAS/detector subsystem

D ...

However, the ‘HiSpeed’ series scanners are principally grouped into four, for which the following notations are given
respectively:
‘NP’, ‘NP+’, ‘NP++’ and ‘Twin’
In this ‘Diagnostics’ manual, these notations NP, NP+, NP++, and Twin are used to describe differences among these
four groups and to make descriptions of this manual read simpler.
(However, ‘Twin’ is further grouped into two, that is, ‘NP+ Twin’ and ‘NP++ Twin’. In general outline,
NP+ Twin systems are NP/NP+ systems with a twin DAS/detector, and NP++ Twin systems are NP++ systems
with a twin DAS/detector. These notations also will be used when required.)

The following table describes the constitution of the major hardware of NP, NP+, NP++, and Twin.

Hardware Constitution

Subsystem/Component NP NP+ NP++ NP+ Twin NP++ Twin


OC – common
Gantry Mechanics – Position- Halogen Laser
ing Light Lamps
Mechanics – others common
Electrics Firmware only is different.
Table IMS Standard or Option Standard Standard or Standard
(Intermediate Support) Option
Others common
DAS – common twin DAS
Detector – common twin detector
X–ray Generator – common (Jedi) NP++ Jedi Jedi NP++ Jedi
X–ray Tube – common (D3142T tube) D3152T D3142T D3152T
tube tube tube
PDU – common

i
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

ii
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – SERVICE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-1 Service Tool Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-2 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-1-3 Service Desktop User Interface (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1-1-5 Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1-1-6 Accessing the System Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
1-2 AUDIO CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
1-3 AUTOMATED ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
1-3-1 POR (For the Single Detector System ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
1-4 AUTO DAS LINEARITY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
1-5 AUTO POST RECON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
1-6 DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
1-7 DASM DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
1-8 DETECTOR CHANNEL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
1-9 GENERATOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1-10-1 View Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1-10-2 Format Raw Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
1-10-3 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
1-11 GETSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42
1-11-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42
1-11-2 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43
1-12 HEAT SOAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44
1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45
1-13-1 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
1-13-1-1 Interactive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48
1-13-1-2 Offline Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–52
1-14 IMAGE PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–53
1-15 MTF SURVEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
1-16 OFFLINE SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59
1-16-1 T/G Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59
1-17 RAW DATA FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–61
1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–62
1-18-1 Z–Axis Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–67
1-18-2 DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–71
1-19 SERVICE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–75
1-20 SERVICE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–76
1-21 SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77

i SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE
1-21-1 Application Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77
1-21-2 System Shutdown (For the system V/R 5.5 or later) – Class C . . . . . . . . . . 1–77
1-22 SYSTEM BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78
1-23 TUBE PRO. (NOFILM, CHANGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83
1-24 TUBE PRO. (NOFILM, MFG.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84
1-25 TUBE PROCEDURE (CHANGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85
1-26 TUBE PROCEDURE (MFG.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–89
1-27 UPDATE SYSTEM LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–90
1-28 USER PREFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–91
1-29 VECTOR CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–92

SECTION 2 – MESSAGE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 MESSAGE DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 ERROR LOG VIEWER MESSAGE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

SECTION 3 – UNIX COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 UNIX COMMANDS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 Disk Usage Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-2 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-3 Software Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-4 How to Collect Log (SnapState) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-5 How to Display History Log (For V/R 4.13 or later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-1-6 How to Use MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-1-7 How to Display Cooling Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-1-8 How to Rise the Tube Temperature to 100 % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-1-9 How to Install SMPTE and QA Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-1-10 How to Change AutoVoice, X–ray Buzzer Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-1-11 How to Change Image Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-1-12 How to Change Image Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-1-13 How to Change Display Gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-1-14 How to Restart Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-1-15 How to Delete All Recon Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-1-16 How to Change Exhibition Mode, Stand Alone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-1-17 How to Perform Z–axis Collimation Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-1-18 How to Change the Artifact Correction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12

SECTION 4 – IRIX GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 IRIX OPERATING COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 LOG FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-4 SCRIPTS AND EXECUTABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4-5 VI EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10

ii SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 5 – SOFTWARE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1


5-1 SOFTWARE STRUCTURE DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 SOFTWARE MODULE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-1 UIF: User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-2 IOS: Imaging and Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-3 ScanReconMgr: Scan Recon Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-4 ScanCtrl: Scan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5-2-5 tgp_in, tgp_out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5-2-6 AcqCtrl: Acquisition Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-2-7 RawMgr: Raw Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-2-8 RawLoad: Raw Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-2-9 RawStore/RawStoreSlave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-2-10 ReconCtrl: Recon Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-2-11 ReconJob: Recon Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5-2-12 ImageReceive, RTImageReceive, RTScoutReceive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-2-13 ToolCtrl: Tool Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6

SECTION 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1


6-1 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN OC, TGP, OGP, CIF AND JEDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-1-1 Theory of Wake–up Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-1-2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6-2 DAS DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6-2-1 Pre–requisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6-2-2 DAS TRIG Signal Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6-2-3 DAS Data Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6-2-4 Data Path Troubleshooting under Intermittent Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6-3 IMAGE DATABASE TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
6-3-1 Image–Database–Oriented Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
6-3-2 Log Files for Image Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
6-4 DICOM FILMING OR NETWORK TRANSFER IS SLOW (NETWORK TIPS) . . . . . . 6–15

SECTION 7 – RING VALUE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

iii SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

iv SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

SECTION 1 – SERVICE TOOL

1-1 GENERAL
Click on the ‘Service’ icon to display the Service Tool desktop.

1-1-1 Service Tool Structure

The Tools for V/R 5.5x or later ONLY:


Underlined : Class C tool
Depending on the system version, some tools cannot be used. (See
table 1–1, Service tool index, Version compatibility.)

Error Logs Diagnostics Image Quality Calibration


Generic System Analyzer Automated Alignment
OC SYSLOG (System Browser) Offline Scan
Scan Analysis Service Calibration
Viewlog Generic System Analyzer
Image Profile CT Number Adjustment
Scan Analysis
AW Logs (System Browser) MTF Survey Quick CT Number Adjustment
Auto Scan
Install SMTPE Image Gravity SAG
Storelog Auto DAS Linearity Test
Verify Security Heat Soak
System Browser (All features) DAS Data Transfer Test
Shell Audio Controls
Tube Usage (System Browser) Generator Test (Shutdown)
Verify Security
H/W Diagnostics (Shutdown)
Update System Log Shell
View H/W Diag
Shell DASM Diag
Auto Post Recon Test
Detector Channel Information
Vector Convert
SnapState
FRU Report Toolboxes/Utilities PM
Configuration Verify Security
User Preference Shell Service Manual Offline Scan
OC Hardware Info (System Browser) Raw Data Function Generic System Analyzer
Software Version
Replacement Increment Exam# Audio Controls
Verify Options Offline Scan Savestate System Browser
Verify Security Generic System Analyzer Selective Save getStats
Shell Tube Procedure (Mfg.) SnapState Service Notepad
Tube Procedure (Change) Calculator Verify Security
*Tube Pro. (NoFilm, Mfg.) Calendar Shell
*Tube Pro. (NoFilm, Change) getStats
Change Display IP
Generator Test (Shutdown)
Shutdown Home
Auto DAS Linearity Test
Automated Alignment –Application Shutdown See Section 1-1-4.
Service Calibration – System shutdown
CT Number Adjustment Verify Security
* : For the system witn Quick CT Number Adjustment Shell
Version 6 or later ONLY Verify Security
Shell

1–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-1 Service Tool Structure (Continued)

The Tools for V/R 5.0x or lower ONLY:


Underlined : Class C tool
Depending on the system version, some tools cannot be used. (See
table 1–1, Service tool index, Version compatibility.)

System Func. Check Service Adjustment Diagnostics & analysis Utilities


Offline Scan Service Calibration H/W Diagnostics Raw Data Functions
Auto Scan Automated Alignment DAS Data Transfer Test Install SMPTE image
Auto Image Verification CT Number Adjustment Auto Post Recon Test Vector Convert
Auto DAS Linearity Test Quick CT Number Adj. Generic System Analyzer Increment Exam#
Generator Test Audio Control Scan Analysis User Preference
Heat Soak Detector Channel Information SnapState
Gravity sag MTF Survey Viewlog
Tube Procedure (Mfg.) Image Profile SaveState
Tube Procedure (change) Verify Security
Service Manual
Selective Save
System Tools Information DASM Diag
Calculator Software Version FRU Report
Calendar Update System Log
Unix Shell
System Browser
Application Shutdown

1–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-2 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order)


The service tools provided are listed in Table 1–1, in alphabetical order.

Note
The Class C tools are filled in gray.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Note
The Class A tools, yet including the Class C sub menu, are filled in yellow stripe.

Table 1–1 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order)

Tool Description System Soft- Section No.


ware V/R (for details)
Application Shutdown Terminates the application software to enter the desk- All 1-21
top menu.
Audio Controls X–ray On Sound Params, Alert Sound Params, All 1-2
Autovoice Volume, CD Sound Volume
Auto Image Verification N/A currently. N/A –

Auto Scan You can perform continuous scans automatically with All –
several protocols, but this is the tool for engineering

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
evaluation, not for FE (field engineer).

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Automated Alignment
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Tube Rough ISO Alignment, Tube ISO Alignment, Ra- All 1-3

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
dial Alignment, Bowtie Filter Alignment, Phantom Cen-
tering, Tube POR Alignment

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Auto DAS Linearity Test ÍÍÍÍÍ
Tests the linearity of CAM board amplifiers. All 1-4

Auto Post Recon Test Tests that post recon operations are correctly per- All 1-5
formed on a specified raw data file.
AW Logs (System Shows log files of ISO LOGS in System Browser. 5.50 or later 1-22
Browser)
Calculator Provided functions: All –
x, /, +, –, 1/x, x^2, SQR, sin, cos, tan, log, ln, y^x, x!, (,
), etc.
Calendar Monthly display. All –

Change Display IP Allows the remote (InSite) user to change the IP Ad- 5.50 or later –
dress where GUI’s and icon’s will be displayed.
For no use in a Field Engineer.
CT Number Adjustment KV values only can be selected (80 kV, 120 kV, All –
140kV). It takes approx. 30 minutes to complete it.
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment.
Note: If you do not click on Confirm in the scan con-
firm screen within 15 minutes, Time–out occurs.

1–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

Table 1–1 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order)

Tool Description System Soft- Section No.


ware V/R (for details)
DAS Data Transfer Test Tests that test pattern data is correctly sent to the op- All 1-6
erator console.
DASM Diag Analyzes communication status between the HOST 5.00 or later 1-7
computer and DASM or between the HOST computer
and camera.

Detector Channel Infor- Shows the relation among Channel No., ring radius, All 1-8
mation CAM No., cable No., etc.
FRU Report When entering this menu, the errors about TGP, OGP, 5.00 or later –
and DAS are displayed. Then when entering the error
code and clicking on Find, a list of suspicious parts to
be replaced is displayed.

Generator Test Retrieve JEDI Error Log, Saved RAM upload, Saved All 1-9
RAM download, kV Diagnostics, Heater Diagnostic,
Rotor Diagnostic, (others)

Generic System Analyz- View Log Files All 1-10


er Tube Usage Log
Tube Spits Log
Bad Raw Log

Format Raw Data


Fan Data
DAS Data

Analysis
View Raw Data
View Vector
Calculations

getStats Allows you to know the Gantry revolution and tube 5.50 or later 1-11
spits.
Gravity sag Allows you to perform a Gravity sag procedure easily. 4.00 or later –
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, System, X–ray
Alignment, Gravity sag.

Heat Soak Scan protocols (Scan Group# 1 ∼ 7) are programmed All 1-12
for heat soak scans.

1–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

Table 1–1 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order)

Tool Description System Soft- Section No.


ware V/R (for details)
H/W Diagnostics Diagnostics: All 1-13
Diagnostics for operator console boards and devices
are provided. Read first Cautions written in Section
1-13, H/W Diagnostics, when performing safety test.

View Log:
Displays diagnostics related logs.

Image Profile The graphical profile data on selected line of the image 4.00 or later 1-14
can be displayed. Horizontal, vertical, and free direc-
tion of a line can be selected.

Increment Exam# Increments the exam No. All –

Install SMPTE image Installs the SMPTE image (and QA images for V/R 5.5 All –
or later) to the OC.
For procedures to install and display the images, refer
to Functional Check/Adjustment, Introduction, Com-
mon Procedures, Basic Operation.

MTF Survey Calculates the image spatial resolution performance All 1-15
data of the system.
OC Hardware Info (Sys- Shows log files of OC Info in System Browser. 5.50 or later 1-22
tem Browser)
OC SYSLOG (System Shows log files of SYSLOG OC in System Browser. 5.50 or later 1-22
Browser)
Offline Scan Technic – Scan Type All 1-16
Axial, Helical, Cine, Scout, Stationary,
T/G Control
Quick CT Number Adj. This menu performs the CT number adjustment with All –
fewer scans than ‘CT Number Adjustment’. It takes
approx. 5 minutes to complete it.
Note: If you do not click on Confirm in the scan con-
firm screen within 15 minutes, Time–out occurs.

Raw Data Function For raw data save/load using an MOD. All 1-17

Savestate Saves/restores scan protocols, calibration files, All –


autovoice data, and other data to/from an MOD.
Scan Analysis Analyzes the raw data so that the scan header or cal 4.10 or later 1-18
vector can be displayed.
Selective Save Saves/restores selectively scan protocols, calibration All –
files, or autovoice data, to/from an MOD.
Service Calibration Auto Sequence 1 ∼ 5, Q Cal, XT Cal, AV Cal, DG Cal, All 1-19
Asymmetric Seq

1–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

Table 1–1 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order)

Tool Description System Soft- Section No.


ware V/R (for details)
Service Manual Displays the contents of CT service CD–ROMs. 4.00 or later 1-20

Service Notepad Allows you to make/save a memo. 5.50 or later –


The memo can be seen in the message log report
(Section 1-1-6). In addition, this information is re-
corded in the Health page file so that it will be reported
to the OLC via InSite.

(Unix) Shell Unix Shell window is displayed. To terminate the shell All –

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
window, enter exit.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Shutdown
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Includes the two types of “Shutdown”. One is applica- All 1-21

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
SnapState
ÍÍÍÍÍ
tion shutdown, the other is system shutdown.
Collects information for debug purpose. All –

Software Version Shows the system name and software version. All –
(e.g., ‘HiSpeed Series 5.01’)
For V/R 5.5 or later only, the detailed information of all
softwares installed in the system appears. When
checking current software version only, see Home, OC
Application Software. (Section 1-1-4) To terminate this
window, enter Q.

Storelog Saves core, log, and data file to the file, /usr/sc/log/ 5.50 or later –

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
System Browser
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
xxxx.xxx for troubleshooting.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Shows the log files of GE System Log, SYSLOG_OC, 4.10 or later 1-22

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
IOS_LOGS, Tube_Usage, Run_time_stats, OC_Info,

ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Config_Files, History_log, and Software_Health_Page.

System Shutdown Terminate all softwares to shut down the system. 5.50 or later 1-21

Tube Pro. (NoFilm, For Single Detector system ONLY: 6.00 or later 1-23
Change) When the tube is replaced, use this program for ad-
justment.

Tube Pro. (NoFilm, Mfg.) For Single Detector system ONLY: 6.00 or later 1-24
For manufacturing use.
Tube Procedure For Twin system ONLY: 5.00 or later 1-25
(change) When the tube is replaced, use this program for ad-
justment.

Tube Procedure (Mfg.) For Twin system ONLY: 5.00 or later 1-26
For manufacturing use.
Tube Usage (System Shows log files of Tube Usage in System Browser. 5.50 or later 1-22
Browser)
Update System Log Updates ‘Tube Usage’ log, ‘Tube Spits’ log, or ‘Bad All 1-27
Raw’ log.

1–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

Table 1–1 Service Tool Index (Alphabetical Order)

Tool Description System Soft- Section No.


ware V/R (for details)
User Preference Sets ‘Axial image direction’, ‘Gantry direction’, etc. All 1-28

Vector Convert Vectors: Warmup Whole, Warmup History, Hilight, Air All 1-29
& Ptm
Verify Options Shows the options which always have been installed. 5.50 or later –
To terminate this windows, click on Cleanup in the
Service desktop or select Quit from the pop–up menu
of the left upper corner of the window.

Verify Security Displays information of Security Level, Key Expiration All –


Date, and UserID.
used when the security key can not be recognized.
Refer to Section 1-1-5.

View H/W Diag Views Diag Log, P–ON Test Log, SYSLOG, or HINV 5.50 or later –
inventory.
Viewlog Views GE sys log files. The same log files as ones All –
shown in the System browser are displayed.

1–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-3 Service Desktop User Interface (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY)

When Starting Service Desktop:


When clicking on Service icon to start the service desktop, the Image works browser also start up and the Service
Desktop hides behind it.

To display the Service Desktop fully, perform either of the followings:

D Click on Start SV Desktop button or

D Click on the border on the Service desktop

Click button.
Click border.
Service Desktop

Cleanup

The Cleanup button on the bottom of the desktop cleans up any previously opened windows, and restores the desktop
to its original state, rather than closing or dismissing each individual application visible on the Service Desktop.

The Cleanup button should be selected whenever the user is done with the Service Desktop or whenever it is desired
to get the desktops back to a known state.

1–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-3 Service Desktop User Interface (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)

Using the Mouse on the Service Desktop:


Use the mouse to access and operate diagnostics and tools, or open a shell and type/enter a UNIX command line.
Use the mouse to make screen selections on the service desktop.

Typical mouse button functions:

Function Mouse Button to be used How?


Window Resize Left button Move the mouse pointer at the border of the window,
then press and hold the left button and drag the cursor
to resize the window.
Window Move Center button Move the mouse pointer at the border of the window,
then press and hold the center button and drag the
cursor to move the window.

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY)

1–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)

System Information

Item Meanings
Facility This information is Hospital Name set in System Configuration –> System setting.
Suite Name This information is Host Name set in System Configuration –> Network setting.
System Type This information is Model Name set in System Configuration –> System setting.
System ID This information is Machine Number set in System Configuration –> System setting.
IP Address This information is IP Address set in System Configuration –> Network setting.
Access Level When the security key is connected to the OC, “Class M” and its expiration date are
displayed. Refer to Section 1-1-5, Security Key.
Software Installation This information is updated automatically when performing LFC or LFW. Note that this
Date is NOT updated when installing the patch software only.
DASM Camera When selecting System Configuration –> Camera Setting –> Laser Camera, “Laser
Camera” is displayed.
DICOM Network This information is Device Files set in System Configuration –> Camera Setting –>
Cameras DICOM Printer.
Installed Tube This is information recorded in the tube usage file.
This is automatically reset when performing Update system log –> Tube Usage (sec-
tion 1-27) at tube replacement.
Tube Install Date This is information recorded in the tube usage file.
This is automatically reset when performing Update system log –> Tube Usage (sec-
tion 1-27) at tube replacement.

Current System Status

Item Meanings
System Date To modify this information, use Application shutdown –> Date Setting.
System Time To modify this information, use Application shutdown –> Date Setting.
OC Application Soft- The current application software version is displayed.
ware
Next Patient Exam The next patient examination number is displayed.
Recon Status

Archive Status For a remote user only:


The same information as the Scan top panel,
panel illus-
illus
Network Status trated on the left, are displayed in these columns.
Filming Status

1–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)

System Health Information

Item Meanings
Total Gantry Revolu- Indicates the Gantry rotation numbers in “Status” column. This indication can be reset
tions using getStats (section 1-11). The date when the counter was reset is displayed in “In-
formation” column.
The rotation number is slightly less than the mechanical Gantry rotation counter located
near the TGP board (a few %), because this software counter does NOT read all of G
pulse interrupt.
The data of rotation number is sent to the OC just when the Gantry stops.
Total Tube Spits Indicates total tube spits numbers currently.
This is automatically reset when performing Update system log –> Tube spits (sec-
tion 1-27) at tube replacement.

IQ Performance Tool Status


This tools give us advance notice for IQ performance change.

For the system with V/R 5.5x or later, the two types of warm–up scan can be selected:

D Tube Warm–up: performs tube several warm–up scans. These can achieve 13% case temperature.

D Daily calibration (Warm up): performs conventional tube warm–up scans (tube warm–up scans:30% case
and calibration scans) plus IQ performance measurement scans. (For detail scan protocol, refer to IQ
performance Measurement scan described below.)

So, whenever the daily calibration is performed, the IQ performance data are collected and analyzed automatically,
and the results are stored in the file, then displayed on the “Status” column of the IQ Performance Tool Status. The
“Information” means the date when the status has been determined.
The three types of status are displayed:

D GREEN: displayed when the result is WITHIN allowable specifications. (Also refer to IQ performance tool
specifications.)

D YELLOW: displayed when the result is OUTSIDE OF allowable specifications. There is a possibility to
affect Image Quality. (Also refer to IQ performance tool specifications.)

D RED: displayed when the result is OUTSIDE OF allowable specifications. A serious Image Quality prob-
lem might occur. (Also refer to IQ performance tool specifications.)

Note
The results are stored as a vector file, so that they can also be seen using Scan Analysis, DD file
analysis function. (For mA Smudge and Scan Time Smudge Only, they can not be seen, because
the files can NOT be made.)
The files is stored up to 5MB. In excess of 5MB, the directory of the files will be cleaned up when
executing this tool. Since the vector files of approx. 400 KB per daily calibration are created, 10 days’
data can be stored. However calculation in Scan Analysis reduces data to be stored.

1–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)

IQ Performance Measurement Scan


The following scans are performed as IQ Performance Measurement scans.

Item Scan Type Scan Thick- kV mA Focus Rotor X–ray


Time ness
Air Calibration 10mm Axial 1.0 10 120 30 Large ON ON
* Air Calibration 7mm Axial 1.0 7 120 40 Large ON ON
* Air Calibration 5mm Axial 1.0 5 120 60 Large ON ON
* Air Calibration 3mm Axial 1.0 3 120 100 Large ON ON
Offset SD/Mean Axial 0.8 1 0 0 Large ON OFF
Detector/DAS Linearity Stationary 1.0 3 120 60 Large ON ON
Detector/DAS Linearity Stationary 1.0 3 120 200 Large ON ON
Detector/DAS Linearity Stationary 3.0 3 120 70 Large ON ON
* AB Ratio Stationary 1.0 1 120 100 Small ON ON
* Z–axis stop movement Stationary 3.0 1 120 100 Small ON ON
Note: The air calibration renewal data are used for calculating air calibration drift.
*: For Twin System ONLY

1–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)

IQ Performance Tool Specifications


For equation for each item below, refer to IQ Performance Tool Analysis.

Item Meanings Specifications


Green Yellow Red
Offset Mean Validity of offset –1.0 ≤ Mean ≤ 1.0 –2.0 ≤ Mean ≤ 2.0 Mean < –2.0 or
Mean value. Mean >2.0
Offset SD Validity of offset SD SD ≤ 2.0 SD ≤ 3.5 SD > 3.5
value.
Air Cal Drift 10000 Stability of 10 mm 0.95 ≤ New/Old ≤ 0.90 ≤ New/Old ≤ New/Old < 0.90 or
air calibration. 1.05 1.10 New/Old > 1.10
Air Cal Drift 7000 Stability of 7 mm air
calibration.
Air Cal Drift 5000 Stability of 5 mm air
calibration.
Air Cal Drift 3000 Stability of 3 mm air
calibration.
mA Smudge mA–dependent DAS Differences between ≤ 1000 ppm (0.1%) >1000 ppm (0.1%)
Linearity variation #25 and #26 (Cen-
(Center section ter module) and be-
only) tween #27 and #26
≤ 500 ppm (0.05%)
mA Band mA–dependent DAS Difference among ≤ 2000 ppm (0.2%) >2000 ppm (0.2%)
Linearity variation channels ≤ 1000
(Total) ppm (0.1%)
Scan Time Smudge Scan–time–depen- Differences between ≤ 1000 ppm (0.1%) >1000 ppm (0.1%)
dent DAS Linearity #25 and #26 (Cen-
variation (Center ter module) and be-
section only) tween #27 and #26
≤ 500 ppm (0.05%)
Scan Time Band Scan–time–depen- Difference among ≤ 2000 ppm (0.2%) >2000 ppm (0.2%)
dent DAS Linearity channels ≤ 1000
variation (Total) ppm (0.1%)
AB Ratio Q Channel A/B ratio (Q channel ≤± 5% ≤ ± 10% > ± 10%
(See Note below.) 16 view smoothing)
AB Ratio Center A/B ratio (Center ≤ ± 20% ≤ ± 30% > ± 30%
channel 16 view
(See Note below.) smoothing)
AB Ratio Last A/B ratio (Last ≤ ± 20% ≤ ± 30% > ± 30%
channel 16 view
(See Note below.) smoothing)
Note: The 1 ~ 250 View data are NOT used when calculating AB Ratio.

1–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)

IQ Performance Tool Analysis (How to calculate the status)


D Offset Mean/Offset SD:
Uses data of Offset SD/Mean scan (with Offset correction ON and with others OFF) .

D Air Cal Drift:


Uses data of air calibration 3mm~10mm. After completion of calculation for renewing air calibration data,
the new Vector is compared with the reference Vector (that is a Calibration Vector acquired at last CT #
Adjustment) using the following equation.

New Vector / Reference Vector

D mA Smudge:
Uses data of Detector/DAS Linearity scan 60mA and 200mA to calculate linearity difference between #25
and #26 (Center) modules of the DAS/Detector and difference between #27 and #26 modules.

How to Calculate:
1. The Mean Vector is calculated after performing the Offset and Reference Correction of each scan data.
2. Differences between modules are calculated using the following equations, then they are compared with
specifications.

Equation to calculate difference between #25 and #26 (Center) (#25•#26/#26):

NJǒ ȍ 387

i+372
VecA iń ȍ VecB Ǔ * ǒ ȍ VecA ń ȍ VecB Ǔ
387

i+372
i
403

i+388
i
403

i+388
i Nj
ǒȍ ȍ VecB Ǔ
Vec A: 60mA mean vector, Vec B: 200mA mean vector
403 403
VecA iń i
i+388 i+388

Equation to calculate difference between #27and #26 (Center) (#27•#26/#26):

NJǒ ȍ 419

i+404
VecA iń ȍ VecB Ǔ * ǒ ȍ VecA ń ȍ VecB Ǔ
419

i+404
i
403

i+388
i
403

i+388
i Nj
ǒȍ ȍ VecB Ǔ
Vec A: 60mA mean vector, Vec B: 200mA mean vector
403 403
VecA iń i
i+388 i+388

Difference between Difference between


#26 and #25 #26 and #27

#25 #26 #27

1–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-4 Home (For V/R 5.5x or later ONLY) (Continued)


D Scan Time Smudge:
Uses data of Detector/DAS Linearity scan 1sec and 3sec to calculate linearity difference between #25 and
#26 (Center) modules of the DAS/Detector and difference between #27 and #26 modules.

How to Calculate:
Refer to mA Smudge other than Vec A and Vec B. (Vec A: 3 sec mean vector, Vec B: 1 sec mean vector)

D mA Band:
Uses data of Detector/DAS Linearity scan 60mA and 200mA to calculate linearity difference between adja-
cent modules for all channels.

How to Calculate:
1. The Mean Vector is calculated after performing the Offset and Reference Correction of each scan data.
2. Difference between modules are calculated using the following equations, then they are compared with
specifications.

HPF (Vec A / Vec B)


(Vec A: 60mA mean vector, Vec B: 200mA mean vector)

D Scan Time Band:


Uses data of Detector/DAS Linearity scan 1sec and 3sec to calculate linearity difference between adjacent
modules for all channels.

How to Calculate:
Refer to mA Band other than Vec A and Vec B. (Vec A: 3 sec mean vector, Vec B: 1 sec mean vector)

D AB Ratio Q Channel/Center/Last:
Uses data of AB ratio scan. For Q cal channel, Center Channel, and Last Channel, (kA–B) / (kA+B) are
calculated per view, then they are compared with specifications for16 view smoothing.

The channels to be used:


Q cal channel: 1~3 ch, Center Channel: 396~398 ch, Last Channel: 791~793 ch

D Z–axis step movement:


The motor pulse and Z–channel Vectors are only calculated and stored.

1–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-5 Security Key


To use the Class C service tools, remove the key cover, and connect the security key to the connector. See below.
Some time (approximately 20 sec) is required for class C menus to become available, after any service tool opera-
tions.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
If the Class C menu are NOT displayed, click on ‘Verify Security’ in the Service Tool with the
security key connected to the connector.

Security
Key Con-
nector

1–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-1-6 Accessing the System Message Log


To display the System Message Log Report, click the status message area on the desktop, then click on View Log.

Click this
message
area.

1–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-2 AUDIO CONTROL

Table 1–2 Audio Control

Audio Adjustable Parameter


X–ray On Sound Params Volume, Pitch, Length
Alert Sound Params Volume, Pitch, Length
Autovoice Volume Volume
CD Sound Volume Gantry Volume, Operator Console Volume

1–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-3 AUTOMATED ALIGNMENT

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Table 1–3 Automated Alignment

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Note

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The Menu filled in yellow stripe below are the Class C tool.

Automated Alignment Menu Displayed Instruction


(Sequence)
Tube ISO Alignment Air Scan → Pin Scan
[Adjust Tube position without Bowtie Filter]
Tube Rough ISO Alignment Air Scan → Pin Scan
[Adjust Tube position without Bowtie Filter]
Radial Alignment Air Scan → Rad Pin Scan
[Adjust Detector position without Bowtie Filter]
Tube Alignment must be completed before Radial Alignment.
Bowtie Filter Alignment Air Scan [without BTF] → Air Scan [with BTF]
Adjust Bowtie Filter position.
Phantom Centering –
POR Alignment Filmless POR,
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, System, X–ray alignment, POR
ystem

for Twin System.


Twin Sys

BOW Alignment When POR is correctly adjusted, then filmless BOW (Beam–ON–Win-
dow) can be performed. Measure the three points of the channel bands
and move the Detector to align the wave is just on the 0 line. In this ad-
justment, vertical axis is normalized in value so that center is 0 and Max,
Min is 1 and –1.
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, System, X–ray alignment, BOW
for Twin System.
Q–cal Channel Ratio Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, System, X–ray alignment, Q–cal
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
POR
Channel Ratio.
Refer to the following instrucitons, Section 1-3-1.

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
00 or later ONLY
Dettector System

Air Scan (Small Focus) → Air Scan (Large Focus)

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ For Small Focus:

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Tool Scan (Azimuth 0 deg) → Tool Scan (Azimuth 180 deg)
For Large Focus:

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Tool Scan (Azimuth 0 deg) → Tool Scan (Azimuth 180 deg)

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Fo V/R 6.0

Film POR Stationary Scan (Azimuth 0 deg.→ 180 deg)

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Single

Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, System, X–ray alignment, POR

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Except for Twin System.
For
S

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
BOW

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Film BOW
N/A
Stationary Scan (Azimuth 0 deg.)

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, System, X–ray alignment, BOW
Except for Twin System.

1–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-3 AUTOMATED ALIGNMENT (continued)


Note
The Tube Rough ISO Alignment and Radial alignment are rarely performed. Only when loosening
the detector locking screw, they must be performed.

1-3-1 POR (For the Single Detector System ONLY)

Special Tool
D POR Tool (2168161)

This program checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x–ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation within the specification.

1. Set the POR Tool to the phantom holder.

Verification of the POR Tool positioning (on the horizontal plane):

a. Perform a scout scan on the POR Tool at Scout plane 0 degree.


The scout image appear.

b. Press on Grid On/Off button.

c. Verify that the horizontal line and the edge of the POR Tool are parallel. See Illustration below.

d. Verify that the POR Tool is placed at the center of the X axis.

VERIFY THAT THESE LINES ARE PARALLEL

POR–TOOL

HORIZONTAL LINE

CENTER OF THE X AXIS (X = 0 mm)

1–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-3 AUTOMATED ALIGNMENT (continued)

1-3-1 POR (For the Single Detector System ONLY) (continued)


Verification of the POR Tool positioning (on the vertical plane):

e. Perform a scout scan on the POR Tool at Scout plane 90 degrees.

f. Press on Grid On/Off button.

g. Verify that the horizontal line and the POR Tool surface are parallel. See Illustration below.

h. Verify that the POR Tool is placed at the center of the Y axis.

HORIZONTAL LINE

CENTER OF THE Y AXIS (Y = 0 mm)


POR–TOOL SURFACE

i. Verify that the POR Tool is not tilted along the Z axis (A–A’ in the illustration below).

A’

If the POR–TOOL is tilted,


the following scout image appears.

A A

A’

1–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-3 AUTOMATED ALIGNMENT (continued)

1-3-1 POR (For the Single Detector System ONLY) (continued)


2. Position the POR Tool at the scan center using localize function (Show Localizer). (In this step a tool is re-
quired to be placed on the scan plane.) See the illustration below.

X=0mm
Y=0mm

POR–TOOL

3. Position the POR Tool at the (scan center +170 mm) height. See the illustration below.
Hold down the [Height] button to display the current height (ex. ‘–206’), and press the [Up] button to raise the
Table by 170 mm (ex. Until the Display reads ‘–036’).

If the Table can not be raised to the specified height due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the S1–T3
Table dip switch on the TGP Board to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this
case, be careful not to have the Table collide against anything.

170 mm Up

CENTER OF SCAN PLANE

1–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-3 AUTOMATED ALIGNMENT (continued)

1-3-1 POR (For the Single Detector System ONLY) (continued)


4. Press INLM button on the Gantry Display panel to reset the current tool position.

5. Remove the Bow–tie filter.

6. Move the cradle out from the Gantry to perform the air scan.

7. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> Tube POR Alignment –> OK.

8. Air Scan:
Perform air scans, according to the instructions displayed.

9. Move the cradle IN to the 0 position set in step 4.

10. Azimuth 0 degree Scan:


Perform tool scans, according to the instructions displayed.

11. Azimuth 180 degree Scan:


Perform tool scans, according to the instructions displayed.

12. The tube travel appears on the screen.


Move the tube according to the instructions displayed. For adjustment, refer to Functional Check / Adjustment,
System, X–ray Alignment, Plane of Rotation.
Repeat steps 8 to 11 until specification is within tolerance.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Move the tube toward the Gantry by 23.81 mm.
Press OK after adjusting the Tube Position.
************************************************************************

1–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-4 AUTO DAS LINEARITY TEST


Note
To perform this ’Auto DAS Linearity Test’, disconnect all of the flex cables (51 cables) connected be-
tween the detector and the DAS (disconnect them at the detector side).
Refer to the Component Replacement manual.

Table 1–4 Auto DAS Linearity Test

Test Parameter to be Description


Specified
Detector Selection For systems with twin detectors, select the ‘A Side’ or ‘B Side’ detector.
([A Side] or [B Side]) For systems with a single detector, the ‘A Side’ only can be selected.

Mode Selection ‘High’: Test of the CAM board linearity at amplification factors of X1 and
([High], [Medium], [Low]) X4, using a ‘High’ level test current.
‘Medium’: Test of the CAM board linearity at amplification factors of X4
and X16, using a ‘Medium’ level test current.
‘Low’: Test of the CAM board linearity at amplification factors of X16 and
X64, using a ‘Low’ level test current.

Usually, select all of ‘High’, ‘Medium’, and ‘Low’.


Scan Type ‘Axial’: The gantry rotates while test data is collected.
[Axial], [Stationary] ‘Stationary’: The gantry does not rotate while test data is collected.
Scan Time Select a scan time, during which test data is collected.

Test Execution
After selecting the parameters in Table 1–4, click [Ok].

The linearity specification is 0.999 ∼ 1.001.


Channels whose linearity data was found out of this specification are listed in the ‘Spec Out Ch#’ window.

Click [Show Numerical] to numerically show linearity data of each channel in the ‘Numerical’ window.

You can store the linearity data to a mean vector.

1–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-5 AUTO POST RECON TEST


This menu automatically tests the operation of post reconstruction for a number of times.
First, select an ID of a raw data file on which post recon test is performed.
And then, input the image ID which is correctly reconstructed from the selected raw data (called reference image).
During the test, recon operation on the selected raw data is performed and then the resulted image is compared with
the reference image to check if they are identical. This check is repeated for the number of times specified or until
specified number of errors occur.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5.xx System, do not select a helical image for this test. Only an axial image can
be used for this test.

Table 1–5 Auto Post Recon Test

Test Parameter to be Selectable Parameter


Specified
Raw ID Enter a raw data file ID directly, or select one from ‘Raw Browser.’
(Exam#, Series#, Acq#)
Image ID Enter the image ID directly, or select one from ‘Image Browser.’
(Exam#, Series#, Image#)
No. of Test (arbitrary)
(arbitrary)
Until Errors Occur
(The test will be terminated after the specified number of errors occur.)

1–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-6 DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST

Table 1–6 DAS Data Transfer Test

Test Parameter to be Selectable Parameter


Specified
Test Mode: Bit by Bit Normal, Infinite
Scan Mode Stationary Scan, Rotate Scan
Scan Time 0.8 (or 0.7, if a 0.7 sec option is installed), 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 1.0 <–> 2.0
Alternate, Sequential (All)
No. of Scan (arbitrary)
No. of Test (arbitrary)
(The total number of scans performed will be (No. of Scan) X (No. of
Test).)
(arbitrary)
Until errors occur. (The test scans will be terminated after the specified number of errors
occur.)

Test Results
[Result of Comparison] → [View Log]:
Select either of the following to view test results previously performed:
‘Das Data Transfer Test Log1’
‘Das Data Transfer Test Log2’
‘Das Data Transfer Test Log3’

1–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-7 DASM DIAG


This tool analyzes communication status between the HOST computer and DASM or between the HOST computer
and camera. The following tests are performed continuously, then the results are displayed.

D hinv:
Displays hardware configuration information.

D scsistat:
Checks the SCSI bus, connectors, and SCSI ID. Make sure that DASM is powered and being run.

D showdasm:
This will query the DASM and provide you with configuration information for it.

D rsp:
Once this command is issued, ‘clrsp’, ‘rqs’, and ‘rsp’ programs are executed in this order. You can check
if the DASM is properly connected to the laser camera.

1–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-8 DETECTOR CHANNEL INFORMATION


In this menu, the relation among the following is shown.

D Detector channel No.

D Ring radius

D DAS transfer order

D CAM No.

D Cable No.

D Module No.

Table 1–7 Detector Channel Information

Menu Description
Detector Channel Number Select any of the following, and then, enter the channel No. in the box.
‘Active Channel’ (1 ∼ 793)
‘Ref1 Channel’ (1 ∼ 10)
‘Ref2 Channel’ (1 ∼ 10)
‘Q Channel’ (1 ∼ 3)
MK1
MK2
VN
VEM (1 ∼ 4)
Radius Enter the radius of a ring artifact. (0.00 mm ∼ 250.00mm)
DAS Transfer Order Enter the transfer order. (1 ∼ 868)

1–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-9 GENERATOR TEST


Click on Generator Test, the following message appears. Enter y to enter the Generator test.

Table 1–8 Generator Test

Command Description JEDI


software
Version
Retrieve Board Version Version information of each board is sent to the operator All
console (OC) and displayed.
Retrieve Software Version Software version information of the JEDI generator is sent All
to the OC and displayed.
Clear Filament aging, Tube status Clears data of filament aging and statistics of the x–ray All
tube currently installed.
This command should be executed after the x–ray tube is
replaced; do not execute this command for the currently
used x–ray tube.
Clear Error Log Clears the error log data stored in the JEDI generator. All
Clear generator tracking/trendiing da- Clears the tracking/trending data stored in the JEDI genera- All
tabase tor.
Error log retrieve (JEDI) Retrieves the error log stored in the JEDI generator, and All
displays it.
The JEDI error log contains up to 60 error records and they
are more detailed than the corresponding error information
provided by the system. The date and time recorded in the
log are generated in the generator (i.e., JEDI time).
If the error log is not displayed due to some error, see the
‘JEDIerror.log’ or ‘JEDIerror.log.detail’ file in the /usr/g/ser-
vice/log directory, as follows:
1. Select Unix Shell from the System Tools menu to open
the winterm window.
2. Enter the following (underlined) in the window.
cd /usr/g/service/log <Enter>
JEDIerror.log <Enter> or
JEDIerror.log.detail <Enter> (detailed log)

(continued)

1–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-9 GENERATOR TEST (continued)

Table 1–8 Generator Test (continued)

Command Description JEDI


software
Version
JEDI tracking/trending datum upload The tracking/trending data stored in the generator is sent to P5.xx or
the OC. later
Code Download (JEDI) Sends the JEDI firmware data to the generator. All
This command is used when the generator firmware need-
ed to be updated.
At first, a data checksum is calculated and then the firm-
ware data is sent to the generator, which takes approxi-
mately 12 hours.
Error Definition file update Updates the error code definition information. P5.xx or
This command should be executed after the Code Down- later
load (JEDI) command is executed, since error code Nos.
are changed by the firmware update.
TnT Definition file update Updates the TnT code definition information. P5.xx or
This command should be executed after the Code Down- later
load (JEDI) command is executed, since TnT code Nos. are
changed by the firmware update.
Saved RAM data Upload The data stored in the generator is sent to the OC. All
Saved RAM data Download Sends the saved generator data to the generator. All
kV Diagnostic (Gates Drive Test) Tests the inverter operation with no main DC power input. All
A delay time until the actual execution starts can be speci-
fied.
Refer to Section 2–10 or 3–10–1 ‘Inverter Gate Command
Diagnostics’, of X–ray Generator of this manual.
kV Diagnostic (Primary power test) Tests the high voltage inverter operation with the inverter All
output shorted.
Refer to Section 2–11 or 3–10–2 ‘Inverter in Short Circuit
Diagnostics’, of X–ray Generator of this manual.
kV Diagnostic (no load kV) Tests the high voltage operation without making x–ray ex- All
posures.
Refer to Section 2–12 ‘No Load HV Diagnostics’ or Section
3–10–3 ‘No Load HV Diagnostic without Anode Rotation nor
Filament Heating’, of X–ray Generator of this manual.

(continued)

1–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-9 GENERATOR TEST (continued)

Table 1–8 Generator Test (continued)

Command Description JEDI


software
Version
Heater Diagnostic Tests the filament heating operation. All
Refer to Section 2–8 ‘Heating Function Diagnostics’ or Sec-
tion 3–8 ‘Heating without HV nor Rotation Diagnostic’, of
X–ray Generator of this manual.
Rotor Diagnostic Tests the x–ray tube rotor operation. All
Refer to Section 2–9 ‘Rotation Function Diagnostics’ or
Section 3–9 ‘Rotation without HV nor Filament Diagnostic’,
of X–ray Generator of this manual.
Set JEDI time Sets the generator date and time equal to the system ones. All
To do this, do ‘get system time’, and then, ‘set JEDI time’.
Checksum saved RAM Calculates a checksum of RAM. All
This command should be executed after a software patch is
performed using the Saved RAM data Download command.

D Click [Apply] to send a selected command to the x–ray generator.

1–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER

1-10-1 View Log Files


IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5.0x System, this function can NOT be used. (This is available for V/R 4.xx or
lower or for V/R 5.5x or later.)

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For V/R 5.5x or later system , the Tube Usage Log menu is deleted. Use Tube Usage in Error
Logs to display the tube usage log.

Table 1–9 View Log Files

View Log Files Submenu Description


Menu
Tube Usage Log Current Tube This log includes the following data:
(Usage Log of the currently
installed tube) 1. Total tube slice counts
2 Number of slices of cluster scans for each scan technique
2.
After Installed 3. Time of each helical/scout scan
(Usage Log of tubes pre-
viously used on the system)
Tube Spits Log – This log includes total spit counts along with time and date.
A trend of spit occurrence frequency can be observed.
Bad Raw Log – This file contains total counts of bad raw data files.

Tube Usage Log


D Use [ ↑ ] or [ ↓ ] keys to scroll the log lists.

D [After Installed] → Previous Tube Usage Log files:


Up to the following five log files ( for five tubes) can be displayed.
‘Sv Tube Usage.log.old1’
‘Sv Tube Usage.log.old2’
‘Sv Tube Usage.log.old3’
‘Sv Tube Usage.log.old4’
‘Sv Tube Usage.log.old5’

1–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-1 View Log Files (continued)

Tube Spits Log


Tube spits log is graphically displayed as below.
The data indicates accumulated values.
KV values used while spits occurred are indicated on the graph.

10 Spits Log Data


9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
No. of Slices 50000

Bad Raw Log


Bad raw data file log is graphically displayed as below.

1 Bad Raw Log Data

–1.0
No. of Slices 50000

1–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-2 Format Raw Data

Table 1–10 Format Raw Data

Format Raw Submenu Description


Data Menu
Fan Data Store to File, Numerical Stores or numerically displays raw data or vector data.
Display The original raw data is converted into floating point number
format with or without data correction or conversion applied.
DAS Data Numerical Display Displays numerically raw data without any data correction or
conversion applied; i.e., displays DAS data itself in hexadeci-
mal format.
A Side For Twin System ONLY:
GS
GSA has as a function
u ct o to manipulate
a pu ate ttwo
o raw
a data ((A a d B).
and ) So we e ca a e mean
can make ea file
eoor
B Side raw file from each detector channel independently. It means, in every scan mode, the two
raw data (A and B) are corrected and used for reconstruction.

Raw Data File Selection


1. Select ‘Generic System Analyzer’ from ‘Diagnostics & analysis.’

2. Select a raw data ID from the lists:

a. Select first an Exam #.

b. Select a Series #.

c. Select an Acq #. If the selected series # above is for a helical scan, further select an Acq #.

1–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-2 Format Raw Data (continued)

Fan Data
D Fan Data Format – Correction & Conversion:
Select whether the following corrections or conversion are to be applied or not.

– Offset File Correction: If ‘Yes’, the raw data is corrected by offset views (offset views are the
first 64 views which are collected prior to x–ray exposure to gather offset data).

– Reference Correction: If ‘Yes’, the raw data is corrected by reference channel data (reference
channels receive direct x–rays, i.e., which have not passed through an object to be scanned).

– Natural Log Conversion: If ‘Yes’, natural log operation is applied to the raw data.

Then, the following data ‘Fan Data Averages’ are displayed:

– Active Views
Max of Max = x.xxxxxx channel x view x
Min of Min = x.xxxxxx channel x view x
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx
Avg of SD = x.xxxxxx
Offset Views
Max of Max = x.xxxxxx channel x view x
Min of Min = x.xxxxxx channel x view x
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx
Avg of SD = x.xxxxxx

1–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-2 Format Raw Data (continued)


D Fan Data Format – File Data Type:
Select either of the following data types (written in bold) to store it to a raw data file or a vector file, or to
display (numerically) it.
‘Original’ is stored to a raw data file, and the others (‘Active Min’, ‘Active Max’, ...) are stored to a vector
file. ‘Vector file’ means here a one–dimensional type file, on the other hand, a raw data file is a two–dimen-
sional file; i.e., each channel has data for each view.

– Original
(Specify 1, 2, ... , or 6, as an ID No. A raw data file stored with this ID No. can be graphically viewed
in ‘View Raw Data’ (Generic System Analyzer → Analysis → View Raw Data).)

(For all the ones below, specify a number as a vector file No. A vector file stored with this number
can be graphically viewed in ‘View Vector’ (Generic System Analyzer → Analysis → View Vec-
tor).)

– Active Min (This vector consists of minimum values of each channel during active views.)

– Active Max (This vector consists of maximum values of each channel during active views.)

– Active Mean (This vector consists of mean values of each channel during active views.)

– Active SD (This vector consists of standard deviation values of each channel during active
views.)

– Offset Min (This vector consists of minimum values of each channel during offset views.)

– Offset Max (This vector consists of maximum values of each channel during offset views.)

– Offset Mean (This vector consists of mean values of each channel during offset views.)

– Offset SD (This vector consists of standard deviation values of each channel during offset
views.)

DAS Data
D Select ‘Channel’ or ‘View.’

– ‘Channel’ is selected: Specify a channel No. Data for every view, of the specified channel, is
numerically displayed in hexadecimal format.

– ‘View’ is selected: Specify a view No. Data for every channel, of the specified view, is numerical-
ly displayed in hexadecimal format.

1–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-3 Analysis

Table 1–11 Analysis

Analysis Menu Provided Functions Description


View Raw Data Magnify, Minify, Gray Displays data of a raw data file as shades.
Scale, Cursor, Numerical,
Plot, Erase, ROI Graphics
View Vector Magnify, Numerical, Plot, Displays data of vector files as graphs.
Erase
Calculations Vect/Vect. Op A+B, A–B, AXB, A/B, ln(A), HPF(A), LPF(A), Diff. Filter(A)
Raw/Vect. Op A+B, A–B, AXB, A/B
Raw/Raw Op A+B, A–B, AXB, A/B, ln(A), HPF(A), LPF(A), Diff. Filter(A)

View Raw Data


Before you use this menu, you have to store a raw data file in the ‘Fan Data’ menu (Diagnostics & analysis → Generic
System Analyzer → Format Raw Data → Fan Data).

1. Select a raw data file from SvSupRaw1, SvSupRaw2, ... , SvSupRaw6.

A raw data file is a two–dimensional type: each channel has data for each view.
In this menu, data is shown as shades, i.e., gray scaling.
Since the length of the vertical axis (view) is not enough for showing all the views, use the scroll bar to display
the not–displayed upper or lower part of views.

Channel
1 1000
1
View
By scrolling, up to the 1037th view
can be displayed.
The actual number of channels or
views varies according to a product
model.

576

Scroll Bar

1–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-3 Analysis(continued)
2. You can use the following functions for the displayed raw data (shades).

D [Magnify]:
Scales up both horizontal (channel) and vertical (view) axes by a factor of any of 1, 2, ... , 9.

D [Minify]:
Select ‘Remove Odd View’ or ‘Remove Even View.’

D [Gray Scale]:
Select ‘Auto range’ or ‘Manual range.’

D [Cursor]:
Shows and sets a (+) cursor to the designated location (channel, view). The cursor can be dragged and
set (by a second click).

D [Numerical]:
Use this after setting a cursor position. Displays values on the positions surrounding the cursor (eight
positions).

Cursor

D [Plot]:
Before selecting this function, show and set a cursor to a location of interest (channel, view) by [Cursor].

– Horizontal Profile: Data for each channel is graphically displayed for the specified view; i.e.,
shades on a horizontal line (on the specified view) are displayed by a graph.

– Vertical Profile: Data of each view is graphically displayed for the specified channel; i.e., shades
on a vertical line (on the specified channel) are displayed by a graph.

‘Auto Scale’ or ‘Manual Scale’ can be selected for the graph plotting. (For ‘Manual Scale’, enter ‘Minimum’
and ‘Maximum’ values.)

D [Erase]:
Erases graphs and/or the cursor.

1–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-3 Analysis(continued)
D [ROI Graphics]:
ROI Graphics Menu: ‘Distance’, ‘Erase’, ‘Ellipse’, ‘Erase All’, ‘Rectangle’

The graphics Distance, Ellipse, and Rectangle can be dragged, sized, and numbered.

Distance Ellipse Rectangle

– Distance: Shows a length (distance) by a number of channels and a number of views.

Number
of Views

Number of
Channels

– Ellipse or Rectangle: Shows the following values of the region inside the graphic.

Mean, Standard Deviation (S. D.),

1–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-3 Analysis(continued)

View Vector
Before you use this menu, you have to store a vector file in the ‘Fan Data’ menu (Diagnostics & analysis → Generic
System Analyzer → Format Raw Data → Fan Data).

1. Select a vector file.

2. Click on [Plot] and select ‘Auto Scale’ or ‘Manual Scale’ to display a graph.

Data of channels are displayed as a graph.


‘Vector File’ means a one–dimensional type file; a typical example is a mean file.

Data

Channel

3. You can use the following functions for the displayed graph.

D [A], ["]:
When the ‘Magnify’ function (refer to below) is used, the length of the horizontal axis is not enough for
showing all the channels.
Shift the graph in the right or left direction with these buttons to display the not–displayed right or left part
of the graph.

D [Magnify]:
Scales up both horizontal (channel) and vertical (data) axes.

D [Numerical]:
Data for each channel is numerically displayed in the right bottom corner area of the monitor screen.

D [Plot]:
Select ‘Auto Scale’ or ‘Manual Scale.’

D [Erase]:
Erases the graph currently displayed.

1–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-10 GENERIC SYSTEM ANALYZER (continued)

1-10-3 Analysis(continued)

Calculations
1. Select any of the following as a combination of data types which arithmetic operations are to be applied to.
‘Vect/Vect. Op’
‘Raw/Vect. Op’
‘Raw/Raw Op’ (Vect: Vector file, Raw: Raw data file)

2. Select a kind of operation (addition, subtraction, division, ...).

3. ‘Enter Output Vector (or Raw File) Number’


(Enter a number; a file with this identification No. will contain the calculation result.)

1–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-11 GETSTATS

1-11-1 General
Click on getStats. The following screen appears to know the Gantry revolution and tube spits.

Show Tube Spits Count


Shows total spits count and last updated date.

Show Tube Spits Log File


Shows total spits count, slice count, and spits count.

Show Gantry Revolution Count


Shows total Gantry revolution count, last updated date, and Gantry revolution count within a specific period.

Reset Total Gantry Revolution Count


Using this function, you can set the total Gantry revolution count to the number you desire. A comment can also
be entered.

Reset Gantry Revolution Count


Using this function, you can set the Gantry revolution count to 0 (Zero).

Show Total Gantry Revolution Count Log File


Shows the number of Total Gantry revolution per day. (The data of 50 days are displayed.)

Show Total Gantry Revolution Counter Reset History


Shows the reset history of the total Gantry revolution count.

1–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-11 getStats (Continued)

1-11-2 Command
You can execute the same getStats function using command line. First run a shell, then enter:

No. Item Command


– getStats main menu getStats
2 Show Tube Spits Count getStats TUBE_SPITS
tubeSpits
tubeSpits –s
3 Show Tube Spits Log file getStats TUBE_SPITS_LOG
tubeSpits –l
4 Show Gantry Revolution Count getStats GANTRY_REV
revCounter –s
5 Reset Total Gantry Revolution Count revCounter TOTALRESET
6 Reset Gantry Revolution Count revCounter RESET
7 Show Total Gantry Revolution Count Log file getStats GANTRY_REV 50
(for 50 days) revCounter –l 50
– Show any Gantry Revolution Count Log file getStats GANTRY_REV [any number]
revCounter –l [any number]
– Show all Gantry Revolution Count Log file getStats GANTRY_REV_ALL
revCounter –a
8 Show Total Gantry Revolution Counter Reset History getStats GANTRY_REV_HISTORY
revCounter –h

1–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-12 HEAT SOAK

Prior to starting Heat Soak


D The x–ray tube should be sufficiently cool.

D If the ‘Cooling time too long’ error message is displayed, you will have to wait at least for 31 minutes to
be able to start Heat Soak.

Table 1–12 Heat Soak

Scan Protocol #Scans


(V4 Cooling) (V5 Cooling)
Scan Group# 1 10 10
Scan Group# 2 10 20
Scan Group# 3 30 10
Scan Group# 4 30 20
Scan Group# 5 20 3
Scan Group# 6 15 –
Scan Group# 7 5 –

D Click [Report] to check the results, after performing heat soak scans.

1–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS

CAUTION
Unexpected x–ray exposure! After finishing tests in Diagnostics of H/W Diagnostics, power
Off the system before rebooting the system. This is to avoid unexpected accidental x–ray
exposure, because not all the hardware devices are initialized only by rebooting the system.

Click on H/W Diagnostics, the following message appears. Click on YES to enter the H/W Diagnostics.

1–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

Table 1–13 H/W Diagnostics

H/W Diagnostics Submenu Description


Menu
Diagnostics Interactive Test Provided Tests:
(Refer to below for Monitor Test, Keyboard Test, Audio Test,
how to reach this Misc Test (Hardware Inventory, SCSI Test, View SYSLOG,
menu.) NPR LED, Safety Loop, Shutdown Test),
Work Station Default Test
(Refer to ‘Interactive Test – XXXXXX’ in Section 1-13-1 (Diag-
nostics) in this section.)
Offline Test Provided Tests:
NPR PCI TEST, DBPCI#0 PCI TEST, NPR INTERNAL TEST
(Refer to ‘Offline Test’ in Section 1-13-1 (Diagnostics) in this
section.)
Function Test N/A currently.
View Log* View Diag Log Displays the log of diagnostics results.
View SYSLOG Displays the system log (from the latest system start–up to the
present).
View P–ON Test Log Displays P–ON Test results.
H/W inventory Displays a list of main operator console hardware devices.
Open File –
*: Many of the ‘View Log’ submenus are included in ‘Diagnostics’; however, this ‘View Log’ can be used without
terminating the application unlike ‘Diagnostics.’

1–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1-13-1 Diagnostics
1. Click [Diagnostics] in the H/W Diagnostics menu, and then the following message is displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Attention
This requires the application to be shutdown.
Continue ?
************************************************************************
2. Click [YES], and then some messages and windows are shown, and then the following message is displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Okay to power off the system now.
Press any key to restart.
************************************************************************
3. Switch OFF the power switch on the operator console (OC).

4. Wait for several minutes, and then, switch ON the power switch on the OC.

5. During the power–up sequence, the following screen will appear:

Power on test

DBPCI test

DBPCI test : OK

Errors :
H/W diag

Startup

Shutdown

6. Promptly click [H/W diag].

1–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1-13-1 Diagnostics (continued)

1-13-1-1 Interactive Test

Misc Test – Hardware Inventory (hinv)


Displays a list of operator console hardware devices which are identified by the operating system software.

Refer to Table 1–14 which lists some of the displayed devices and their names.

Table 1–14 Hardware Inventory (for System Software versions earlier than V4.00)

Displayed Device Device Name


Disk drive: unit 1** on SCSI controller 3 Raw data disk
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 3 Raw data disk*
Optical disk: unit 6 on SCSI controller 1 MOD drive)
Optical disk: unit 5 on SCSI controller 1 MOD drive*
Common device: unit 4 on SCSI controller 1 Serial port expander (ST1800)
Disk drive: unit 3 on SCSI controller 1 DASM*
CDROM: unit 1 on SCSI controller 1 CD–ROM drive
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 0 System disk*
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 0 System disk
PCI SCSI controller 3: Version ADAPTEC 7880 UW SCSI card (AHA–2940UW)
Unknown Type PCI: Bus 2, Slot 6, Function 0, Vendor DBPCI board
ID 0x10b5, Device ID 0x9060
Unknown Type PCI: Bus 2, Slot 5, Function 0, Vendor NPR (NP Recon Engine) Assy
ID 0x10b5, Device ID 0x9061
Bit3 PCI Bridge Card: Bus 2, Slot 4 PCI extender card (on the backplane board)
Bit3 PCI Bridge Card: Bus 1, Slot 4 PCI backplane controller card
Bit3 PCI Bridge Card: Bus 0, Slot 4 PCI host card (within the host processor (O2))
Integral SCSI controller 1: Version ADAPTEC 7880 SCSI controller 1 included in the host processor (O2)
Integral SCSI controller 0: Version ADAPTEC 7880 SCSI controller 0 included in the host processor (O2)
*: Indicates that this is an optional device; otherwise (without *), this is a standard device.
**: The number ‘unit 1’ indicates a SCSI device ID number; the set ID number should equal this unit number.
(This description applies to other unit numbers.)

1–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1-13-1 Diagnostics (continued)

Table 1–15 Hardware Inventory (for System Software V4.00 or later)

Displayed Device Device Name


Disk drive: unit 1** on SCSI controller 3 Raw data disk
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 3 Raw data disk*
Optical disk: unit 6 on SCSI controller 1 MOD drive
Optical disk: unit 5 on SCSI controller 1 MOD drive*
Common device: unit 4 on SCSI controller 1 ST1800 (alternative to Serial Exp)
Disk drive: unit 3 on SCSI controller 1 DASM*
CDROM: unit 1 on SCSI controller 1 CD–ROM drive
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 0 System disk*
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 0 System disk
PCI SCSI controller 3: Version ADAPTEC 7880 UW SCSI card (AHA–2940UW)
Integral SCSI controller 1: Version ADAPTEC 7880 SCSI controller 1 included in the host processor (O2)
Integral SCSI controller 0: Version ADAPTEC 7880 SCSI controller 0 included in the host processor (O2)
Serial Exp: PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device (alternative to ST1800)
36973) pci slot 5
*: Indicates that this is an optional device; otherwise (without *), this is a standard device.
**: The number ‘unit 1’ indicates a SCSI device ID number; the set ID number should equal this unit number.
(This description applies to other unit numbers.)

1–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1-13-1 Diagnostics (continued)

Misc Test – SCSI Test


Displays detailed information about the SCSI devices which are identified by the host processor.

Verify that detailed information is displayed for each of the SCSi devices which are identified in the ‘Hardware Invento-
ry’ (Diagnostics – Interactive Test – Misc Test – Hardware Inventory).

Misc Test – View SYSLOG


Opens a log viewer and displays SYSLOG. SYSLOG is a log file managed by the OS (operating system) and includes
information on the host processor (O2) and also a part of status/error messages generated by device drivers (soft-
ware) for the NPR (NP Recon Engine) and the DBPCI board.

The SYSLOG only contains logs generated since the last start–up which occurred after the last 12 o’clock midnight.
When it passes 12 o’clock midnight, the logs contained up to then are stored and the SYSLOG is initialized.

The following log will be displayed (an example).

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Mar 9 15:19:46 6F:aoyagi syslogd: restart
Mar 9 15:19:46 2A:aoyagi unix: IRIX Release 6.3 IP32 Version 12161207
System V
Mar 9 15:19:46 2A:aoyagi unix: Copyright 1987–1996 Silicon Graphics,
Inc.
..................
Mar 9 15:19:46 5A:aoyagi unix: NOTICE: pcinre attach: Config.address is
0x80022800
Mar 9 15:19:46 5A:aoyagi unix: NOTICE: pcinre_attach: Configuration
fields:
Mar 9 15:19:46 5A:aoyagi unix: NOTICE: Vendor Id = 0x10b5, Device Id =
0x9061, Base_Reg = 0x81000000
..................
Mar 9 15:19:46 5A:aoyagi unix: NOTICE: pcindb attach: Config.address is
0x80032000
Mar 9 15:19:46 5A:aoyagi unix: NOTICE: pcindb_attach: Configuration
fields:
Mar 9 15:19:46 5A:aoyagi unix: NOTICE: Vendor Id = 0x10b5, Device Id =
0x9060, Base_Reg = 0x81400000
************************************************************************

Verify that the underlined information is displayed; other than underlined may be different.
If underlined information is displayed, it indicates that the DBPCI board and the NPR (NP Recon Engine) are initialized
by the host processor.

1–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1-13-1 Diagnostics (continued)

Misc Test – NPR LED


Turns on LEDs on the NPRM (NP Recon Engine Master) board according to the dip switch (S1) setting on the board.
Refer to the illustration below (if switch 2 is set to ON, for example, LED6 should light).

LED7 1 O
2 N
LED6
LED5 3
LED4 4
LED3 5
LED2 6
LED1 7
LED0 8

S1 is set according to the memory capacity and the number of NPRS (NP Recon Engine Slave) boards installed on
the NPRM board. The LEDs turn On during approximately 30 seconds.

Misc Test – Safety Loop


This test turns On/Off the safety loop relay on the REAR CN1 board.

CAUTION
Unexpected hazards! Take appropriate precautions (steering clear of the gantry, etc.) against
gantry/table movement or x–ray exposure before turning On the safety loop relay. And do not
forget to turn Off the relay before exiting the test.

Misc Test – Shutdown Test


Tests the OC power off timer function of the FRONT PNL board.

1–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-13 H/W DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

1-13-1 Diagnostics (continued)

1-13-1-2 Offline Test


To select a test, refer to below:

D Click [NPR] and [PCI TEST] to select ‘NPR PCI TEST’.

D Click [DBPCI#0] and [PCI TEST] to select ‘DBPCI#0 PCI TEST’.

D Click [NPR] and [INTERNAL TEST] to select ‘NPR INTERNAL TEST’.


In ‘NPR INTERNAL TEST’, ‘Master DSP’ or ‘Slave DSP’ can be selected.

Click [DETAIL] to check/set test parameters.

Other selectable parameters:

Parameter Selection
WHEN ERROR OCCUR STOP, CONTINUE
TEST MODE NORMAL, QUICK, MANUAL

For more detailed information about Offline Test, refer to Section 1–3, Off–line Test, of the Operator Console tab.

1–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-14 IMAGE PROFILE


The graphical profile data on selected line of the image can be displayed. Horizontal, vertical, and free direction of
a line can be selected.

Selections in Image Profile


1. Click on Browse in Functions selection.
Application sort screen appears.

2. Upon application sort window, you can highlight an EXAM –> Exam. No. –> Series No., and click on Accept .
The desired image appears in the screen.

3. Select the desired image profile type by pressing any of the following buttons:

D Horizontal:
The graphical profile data on the selected horizontal line is displayed.

D Vertical:
The graphical profile data on the selected vertical line is displayed.

D Free:
By selecting two given points, the graphical profile data is displayed.

D FWHM:
Full Width Half Maximum

D Auto:
sets area automatically for profile graphic representation.

D Use FOV:

D Smooth:
Not available yet.

4. Drag a cursor on the displayed image.


The graphical profile data is displayed.

5. To delete the lines, click on Erase. To exit from this program, click on Quit.

1–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-15 MTF SURVEY


Image spatial resolution can be measured by scanning a wire existing within a GE Performance Phantom or equiva-
lent, and analyzing the acquired image with this menu. The menu calculates MTF data by the two–dimensional Fourier
Transform of the point spread function using pixel data around the wire, and displays the MTF curve. Evaluate the
system spatial resolution performance by reading the curve.

Special Tool
D GE Performance Phantom (2102580) or equivalent

Scanning the GE Performance Phantom


1. Set the GE Performance Phantom approximately at the scan center.

1–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-15 MTF SURVEY (continued)


2. Adjust the position of the phantom so that the wire point within the phantom is positioned at the scan center:

a. Perform axial scans with the following parameters (others: default):

Recon FOV Scan Time (Sec) kV mA Thickness Focal Size


10 (Head) 2.0 120 150 10 L
10 (Body) 1.5 120 130 10 L

b. Measure the distance between the wire point and the scan center.

c. Shift the phantom so that the wire point is positioned at the scan center, according to the distances measured
at the above step.
Use the up–down adjuster and right–left adjuster of the phantom holder (one turn: 1 mm movement).

Wire Point

Scan Center

d. Repeat steps a through c, until the wire point is positioned at the scan center within .

If the image shows a white band over the wire point, as shown below, this indicates that the wire point is not yet
positioned correctly at the scan center.

White band

3. Record the image No.

1–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-15 MTF SURVEY (continued)

Mode – ‘Automatic’, ‘Manual’


4. ‘Manual’:
If you select ‘Manual’, proceed to step 5.

‘Automatic’:
If you select ‘Automatic’, perform the following:

a. Perform step 5.

b. Proceed to step 9.

If it does not seem to work well, try the ‘Manual’ mode.

Image ID
5. Enter the image No. (Patient ID#.Exam#.Series#.Image#); or, select the image, using the [Browse] function.

‘Pin Center X’, ‘Pin Center Y’


6. Enter X and Y values as follows. X and Y are the locations of the pin center existing within the phantom.

a. Click [Locate]. The pencil cursor appears on the image field.

b. Use the mouse to position the tip of the cursor on the center of the pin. See below:

Pin

c. Click the right button, and then, the location values are entered into the boxes.

1–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-15 MTF SURVEY (continued)

‘Inner ROI’, ‘Outer ROI’


7. Measure the ROI values, of an area within the pin and of an area encompassing the pin:

a. Click [Measure] for ‘Inner ROI’. A circle cursor appears on the image field.

b. Use the mouse to position the cursor within the pin and enter the value, as follows:

i. Position the cursor, by moving the mouse while pressing the center button.

ii. Adjust the cursor size, by moving the mouse while pressing the left button.

iii. Enter the value into the box, by clicking the right button.

c. Click [Measure] for ‘Outer ROI’.

d. Perform step b. In this step, encompass the pin with the cursor.

Advanced Settings – ‘Adjust’, ‘Use Default’


8. Usually select ‘Use Default’.

1–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-15 MTF SURVEY (continued)

[Compute], [View Plot]


9. Click [Compute]. The MTF values are calculated.

10. Click [View Plot].

11. Read the lp/cm values (on the horizontal axis) of the curve at 0.5, 0.1, and 0.05 (on the vertical axis), using the
mouse. And enter the values in the ‘MTF lp/cm@50%’, ‘MTF lp/cm@10%’, ‘MTF lp/cm@5%’ boxes, respective-
ly. Refer to below:

0.8 EXAMPLE
0.5

0.6

0.4

0.1

0.2 0.05

0
0 2 4 6 8 10

lp/cm@50% lp/cm@5%
lp/cm@10%

[Submit]
12. Click [Submit] to record the data. (File name: /usr/g/service/log/mtf.report)

1–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-16 OFFLINE SCAN

Table 1–16 Offline Scan

Parameter Group Parameter Selection


Technic Scan Type Axial, Helical, Cine, Scout, Stationary, T/G Control (Refer
to Section 1-16-1.)
(others) –
Thickness [mm] For the system with Asymmetric Option Installed only, this
parameter is displayed.
“10: 1” provides 10 mm and 1 mm slices.
“10: 2” provides 10 mm and 2 mm slices.
“6: 1” provides 6 mm and 1 mm slices.
Scan Environment X Ray ON, OFF
Rotor ON, OFF
Data Collection ON, OFF
DAS Mode NORMAL, PATTERN, DAS64L, DAS16L, DAS16M,
DAS4M, DAS4H, DAS1H
Gantry Tilt [deg] (arbitrary)
Tech. for Scan Type (other scan parameters) –

1-16-1 T/G Control

T/G Control
The following mechanical controls of the gantry and table can be performed with this menu. After setting these param-
eters, click on Back to return to perform the 1st screen of Offline scan.

D Table Pos. [mm]: The cradle is moved (horizontally) to a specified position. The cradle button on the
keyboard lights during cradle movement.

D Gantry Tilt [deg]: The gantry is tilted to a specified position. You have to press the tilt button on the key-
board after it lights and continue to press it until the gantry stops tilting.

If a remote tilt option is not installed on the system, you have to press the tilt button on the gantry to execute
the operation.

D Azimuth [deg]: The gantry is rotated to a specified position.

Collimator Control (For Twin System ONLY)


After setting these parameters, click on Back to return to perform the 1st screen of Offline scan.

D Auto Collimator: When set to ON, collimator tracking control during offline scan becomes available.

D Position Change: When set to ON, the collimator can be moved to the desired position using the follow-
ing parameters (Move mode and Pulse) .

1–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-16 Offline Scan (Continued)


D Move mode: When ‘Position Change’ is set to ON, this parameter can be available.

– Abs.: (Absolute position change) moves the collimator from the reference position (zero position)
held by the DAS to the desired position specified by ‘Pulse’ parameter.

– Rel.: (Relative position change) moves the collimator from the current position held by the DAS
to the desired position specified by ‘Pulse’ parameter.

D Pulse: specifies the collimator travel from –8,192 to 8,191 pulses. (1 pulse = 2 micrometers)

D Reset: When set to ON, the collimator position is reset.

D CIF Mode: (For V/R 5.5 or later ONLY)


The following operation can be performed according to the Function mode selected. X–ray ON selection
must be required.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When selecting Zigzag or Vibration mode, do not select Helical or Cine scan as a Scan Type.
This is why one data only is acquired.

CIF Mode
Function Value Operation
Normal 00 Normal Operation
ZIGZAG 01 The collimator moves zigzag. This mode can be used in com-
bination with a tracking mode.
STEP A 02 The collimator moves in 20 pulse steps.
STEP B 03 The collimator moves in 5 pulse steps.
STEP C 04 The collimator moves + 10 pulse every one scan.
STEP D 05 The collimator moves + 1 pulse every one scan.
VIBRATION 10 The collimator vibrates, using for belt tension adjustment. Af-
ter completion of this test, the Gantry must be reset.
TEST A 11 The collimator moves 20 pulses of a reciprocating motion for
test. (for a manufacturing test use) After completion of this
test, the Gantry must be reset.
TEST B 12 The collimator moves 140 pulses of a reciprocating motion for
test. (for a manufacturing test use) After completion of this
test, the Gantry must be reset.
TEST C 13 The collimator moves [Home → 20 pulses] of a reciprocating
motion for test. (for an endurance test use) After completion of
this test, the Gantry must be reset.
Value – Selected when selecting Function as a value. For example, if
“01” is entered, the ZIGZAG function is selected.
– 06–0F Reserved
– 14–7F Reserved

1–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-17 RAW DATA FUNCTIONS

Table 1–17 Raw Data Functions

Bar Menu Pulldown Menu Function


File Exit Exits ‘Raw Data Functions.’
Function Save to MOD (Selected as default when ‘Raw Data Functions’ is selected.)
Selection
Restore/Delete from MOD Loads raw data files from the MOD to the system hard disk, or,
deletes raw data files on the MOD.
Reserve/Release –
Initialize MOD Initializes an MOD inserted.
Raw data Whole Exam, Whole Series, Selects a raw data file, or, all the raw data files of a specified
Selection Individual Raw series No., or, all the raw data files of a specified exam No.

(Note for Twin Systems only)


For Twin systems, do not select ‘Individual Raw’ in the Raw data Selection menu, otherwise, problems may be caused
for retro recon, etc. due to a Twin system algorithm related reason. This means that you should not handle individual
raw data file. Instead, select ‘Whole Exam’ or ‘Whole Series’ in the menu.

1–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS


The scan analysis feature allows users to have interactive access to scan files collected on the scanner. Scan data
to be viewed can come from either Patient Scanning or from service mode tools such as Diagnostic Data Collection
or Calibration.

Analysis is divided into three major areas of: SCAN ANALYSIS, dd FILE ANALYSIS, CAL FILE ANALYSIS, and Z–
tracking (for Twin ONLY). dd FILE ANALYSIS and CAL FILE ANALYSIS is not yet available for this CT System. Each
major section provides an File List Select interface similar to the Image Works List Select, Image Browser. Analysis
List Select allows you to select the appropriate file of interest.

Any of the normal scan files may be selected for processing within Scan Analysis including Axial, Helical, and Scout
scans. Once the scan data of interest is selected you can select one of several processing options which include:
Update, Scan Header, Cal Vectors, Plot MSD, Plot VVC, and Save Scan.

Definitions within Scan Analysis


D dd File (Diagnostic Data File):
dd files are a result file from some type of operation on the scan data file. dd files are typically some form
of view summed file that may have had some specific type of processing applied to it. For example, the
processing applied to the raw data to calculate the position of the pin in ISO alignment results in a tempo-
rary file that is a view summed result that could be saved as a dd file. As long as two dd files have the same
number of data elements in them the two files may be added, subtracted, multiplied, or divided with each
other.

D Means and Standard Deviation File (MSD):


This is usually the result of combining two or more views mathematically which results in Mean Values
for each channel in the views and an associated Standard Deviation for each channel in the views. In es-
sence all of the user selected views in a scan file are summed together resulting in a single “master view”
that contains the averaged data from all of the views. The mean values represent the average data value
from the channels and the standard deviation values represent the amount of variability for that channels
data values across all of the views. The higher the standard deviation the more the channel output varied
from view to view.

D Scan Header:
This is the information contained within the Scan File that identifies the specific settings in affect when
that scan file was created. The Scan Header includes information at several levels including: Exam, Se-
ries, and Scan. Information identifying the technique selections, scan time, acquisition mode, and many
others may be found in the scan header.

D Cal Vectors:
Within Scan Analysis the Cal Vectors are only those vectors contained within the Scan Data File at the
time that the scan was taken.

D VVC (Views vs Channels):


This is a way to graphically represent the data values from each channel for each view of data from the
S–DAS as a shade of grey. The display will have the views stacked vertically and the channels arranged
across the display horizontally.

1–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

Starting the Scan Analysis


Click on Scan Analysis. The following window appears.

Selections in Scan Analysis


Upon starting the Scan List Select window, you can highlight an EXAM –> SERIES –> SCAN, and perform the desired
analysis feature by pressing any of the following buttons:

D Update:
The UPDATE selection will refresh the List Select Display if new scan files have been created since the
Scan Analysis Tool was started.

D Scan Header:
The SCAN HEADER selection will open a scrolling text window that contains the header text information
contained in select scan file.

D Cal Vectors:
The CAL VECTOR selection will open a window that allows you to select which of the calibration vectors
in the selected scan file that you wish to look at. After the selections are made, OK will process the data
requests and display the results.
The resultant plots will be auto–scaled and in some cases the range of data displayed will be set automati-
cally. This is to provide a reasonable initial view of the data. Always check the scale on the left hand side
of the plot displays. Cursor reporting of data value and channel numbers is provided.

1–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)


D Create MDS DD File: (For V/R 5.5x or later)
This will calculate a view averaged “super view” for the selected views and store the results in a separate
file on the systems disk. The display will report the path and filename of the file just created. Once created,
dd File can be viewed or compared with other files to check for specific operating characteristics.

D Plot MSD:
Provides a set of view summed Means and Standard Deviation Plots of a scan file. The plotter is started
to display the means vectors and the standard deviation vectors, computed across the entire scan for each
detector macro row. There will be (4) mean and standard deviation plot sets in the display window.
After Plot MSD is started, a preprocessing option selection window appears:

– Offset Correction:
This processing step removes from the scan data, the signal bias introduced by the acquisition
electronics. This operation is performed on a channel by channel basis for each view.

– Reference Normalization:
Makes use of unobstructed (not blocked by the patient) detector cells at the end of the detector
to adjust for fluctuations in the x–ray beam and effects of aperture size and mA. In the case where
the reference channels are blocked, the system uses an estimated value for the processing. The
steps for Reference Normalizing the scan data involves: Offset Correction for the Reference
Channels, Dividing the Offset Corrected Scan Data by the Averaged Reference Channels for
each view.

– Log Conversion:
The log operation is applied.

– Convolved Data:
This processing step mathematically filters the channel data to remove blurring affects that would
occur when the views are back–projected. The affect is to ‘sharpen’ each channels data value
within the view. Without the convolution step, some of the x–ray attenuation data for a particular
channel ends up in the channels on either side of that particular channel. Convolution puts that
adjacent channel contribution back into the channel data that it should have been in to begin with.

Cursor reporting of data value and channel numbers is provided.


For terminology and usage, refer to Generic System Analyzer.

1–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)


D PLOT VVC:
The PLOT VVC selection provides Views–vs–Channels display of a grey scale representation for the se-
lected scan file. Each view of data (or summed, compressed view) is represented on the display as a hori-
zontal line. Each pixel in the line represents the data value for a particular channel from the DAS.
After VVC is activated,a preprocessing option selection window appears:

– Offset Correction:
This processing step removes from the scan data, the signal bias introduced by the acquisition
electronics. This operation is performed on a channel by channel basis for each view.

– Reference Normalization:
Makes use of unobstructed (not blocked by the patient) detector cells at the end of the detector
to adjust for fluctuations in the x–ray beam and effects of aperture size and mA. In the case where
the reference channels are blocked, the system uses an estimated value for the processing. The
steps for Reference Normalizing the scan data involves: Offset Correction for the Reference
Channels, Dividing the Offset Corrected Scan Data by the Averaged Reference Channels for
each view.

– Log Conversion:
The log operation is applied.

– FFT channel Data:


The combination operation of Offset Correction, Reference Normalization, and Log Conversion
is applied.

– Convolved Data:
This processing step mathematically filters the channel data to remove blurring affects that would
occur when the views are back–projected. The affect is to ‘sharpen’ each channels data value
within the view. Without the convolution step, some of the x–ray attenuation data for a particular
channel ends up in the channels on either side of that particular channel. Convolution puts that
adjacent channel contribution back into the channel data that it should have been in to begin with.

(PLOT VVC, Continued)

1–65 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)


After selecting the box or line cursor using ‘region of Interest’ selection box, click [Plot now]. Once dis-
played, the window and level for the displayed data can be changed to better see variations in the data.

CURSOR BEHAVIOR IN VVC:


Cross hair Cursor reporting is provided for: Data Value, DAS Channel, Detector Channel, and View
number. The cursor is moved across the display using the mouse.
A selection box on the display allows selection of Line Cursors (Channel and View) and Box Cursors (Rec-
tangle) which allow the selection of a Channel, View, or Group of channels and views for plotting. The line
and box cursors can be moved around the screen to view specific areas of interest. When the mouse point-
er cursor is moved over a line cursor the mouse cursor will change to a four pointer arrow. Pressing the
left mouse button allows you to ‘drag’ the cursor across the display.
For the box cursors, the box may be dragged using the left mouse button with the mouse cursor positioned
over the box. The size and shape of the box can be changed by moving the mouse cursor over the Bottom
or Right edges of the box. When over the Bottom or Right edges of the box you can press the left mouse
button to drag the box edge up and down or left and right.
With the Line (Channel and View) cursors the plotted data will represent all Channels for a selected View
or all Views for a selected Channel.
With the Box Cursors the resulting plot will be a view summed Means and Standard Deviation plot for the
selected views and channels.

D Save Scan
This will save the selected scan file to a temporary disk location so that it can moved to MOD or transferred
via FTP to another location.

1–66 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-1 Z–Axis Tracking


The Z–AXIS TRACKING tool is a new TAB for the twin system ONLY, located within the Analysis Tool. The tool can
be used to plot various tracking functions, using a Scan Data Set. For a scan data set, the analysis package can plot
different data versus views in UN–FILTERED (the default) or FILTERED (20 pt. Boxcar) formats.

1–67 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-1 Z–Axis Tracking (continued)


In the figures that follow, examples of “known” Tracking plots are shown. Since plots vary from system to system, the
examples shown should be used only as guides. Compare your System’s plots and analyze them relative to the speci-
fication shown in each figure. The plots shown are UN–FILTERED views, which is the default option when they are
plotted. A 20 point boxcar filter takes the 20 view average and then plots the data.

A value is not considered to be out of specification, unless the limit is exceeded for a sustained interval of 100 views
or more. In the cases where specifications are not given, consider plots informational only.

To use the function “Save to File” , need to make a directory named “data” under root. Then after performing Save
to File, plot data is displayed and text file will be stored into data directory as named “TrackingVsScan.txt” (about 15KB
size). But it is not so useful because of text file.

It is recommended to remove the directory “data” after checking the TrackingVsScan.txt file for system stability.

D Collimator Position:
The plot shows the Collimator Position during a scan. Collimator positions are stored in the Scan file (Raw
Data).
The vertical axis shows the pulse count of Z–Axis pulse motor (20mm/pulse).

1–68 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-1 Z–Axis Tracking (continued)


D Z–Ratio:
Z–RATIO Plot computes the Ratio of Q–Cal Channels A and B. The value is given by the following equa-
tion.

Z_Ratio + K * A * B A and B means Q–Cal channel average data of each detector plane.
K*A)B (K=Qcal channel ratio)

Note
When you make a plot, you may be asked to enter the channel number. This has no meaning, any
input generates same plot.

1–69 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-1 Z–Axis Tracking (continued)


D Center Ratio:
CENTER RATIO plot indicates the calculated Focal Spot position relative to the centerline,
with the center position being 0. The focal spot moves during a scan due to mA, rotor wobble,
gantry rotation wobble, and because of tube (target) heat.

Center_Ch_Ratio + K * A * B A and B means active channel data of each detector


K*A)B plane.(K=Q cal channel ratio)

Note
The Ref. channel Ratio can not be seen by this tool.

1–70 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-2 DD

dd File List Select Overview


dd math is a means for the user to apply mathematical operations: add, subtract, multiply, and divide to dd files, and
calculate the channel to channel difference or ratio of means vs. standard deviation vectors of a dd file. It allows the
user to specify the scaling factor for the output vector, and provides three output modes: plot, dd file, and view num-
bers.

dd math is part of the dd analysis user interface. Scan Analysis is used to generate dd files that may then be manipu-
lated and or examined using dd File Analysis.

1–71 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-2 DD (Continued)

Operating dd Math Function


The dd math operation buttons will be insensitive if no files are selected into the dd math operation panel.

1. The user may start dd math operation(s) by selecting the file(s) and putting them into the selection field by clicking
the button FILE #1 or FILE #2.

If the selected file is not a dd file, the application will not put it into the dd math operation field. A message window
will pop up and ask user to select a dd file.

If only one file is selected and it is of the file type RTS dd file or MSD dd file, both Ch2Ch (Channel to Channel)
and Ratio (RATIO OF MEANS VS. STDV) will become sensitive.

If the selected file is not of the type MSD or RTS, only Ch2Ch will become sensitive.

When two dd files are selected, + (ADD), – (SUBTRACT), x (MULTIPLY), and / (DIVIDE) become sensitive and
Ch2Ch and Ratio will be insensitive.

2. The user can specify the output file name when the dd file output mode is set. Otherwise a default dd file name
will be provided.

3. The default output scaling factor is 1.0. The user can set the scaling factor to any real number.

4. When the dd math operation buttons are sensitive, the user can select the desired button to start the dd math
operation.

dd Files Generation
There are 18 different dd file types of six orientations. The orientations are View, Channel, RTS, CAL, Elements, and
Header.

Channel oriented means and standard deviation type dd files are the only type that can be created from scan data
files in the Scan Analysis application.

1–72 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-2 DD (Continued)

dd Math Functions
dd math consists of the following functions:

D Add

D Subtract

D Multiply

D Divide

D Channel to Channel (Ch2Ch) difference

D Ratio of means vs. standard deviation

Perform: add, subtract, multiply, divide, and channel to channel difference operations on dd files. These operations
are only available for dd file types.

Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide


Applies add, subtract, multiply, and divide between vectors in two dd files. The output file is a dd file with one of the
following suffixes:

D .add

D .dif

D .mul

D .rat

Operations can be performed on dd files in View orientation, Channel orientation, RTS orientation, and Cal orientation.

Currently, no dd type restrictions are applied to operations between dd files, as long as the dd vectors have the same
number of elements. If one file has a single vector and the other file has multiple vectors the mathematical operation
will be applied multiple times using the single vector.
Otherwise the mathematical operation will be applied component wise for the number of vectors in each file.

Channel to Channel Difference


Applies the following calculation to the data from the data set(s) in the dd files for View, RTS or Cal orientation.
(X2–X1), (X3–X2), (X4–X3),...,(Xn–Xn–1)
Where X is the data value for each channel.
The output is channel to channel dd file with extension: .c2c

1–73 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-18 SCAN ANALYSIS (continued)

1-18-2 DD (Continued)

Ratio of Means vs. Standard Deviation


Takes a MSD (means and standard deviation) or RTS (real time statistics) type of dd file, calculates the ratio of data
in the means vector (1st set) to data in standard deviation vector (2nd set). The
output file is a ratio type of dd file with the extension: .rat

dd Math Output Mode


Three output modes are supported in dd math:

D Plot:
Will plot the output dd vector using an on screen vector display.

D DD File:
Allows the user to specify the output dd file name with a full path or the file basename.
If only base name is provided the program will use the default prefix and suffix for the output file. The
created dd file will be shown in the dd file list.

D View #’s (Numbers):


Prints the numerical data of the dd vector(s) to the display window(s). For image file types and scan file
types, it will display the VVC plots of the selected files.

Other Functions in dd Analysis User Interface


The dd math operation panel supports the following functions for various file types.

D Update
Refreshes the display in the dd panel.

D Plot
Plots the vector(s) of the selected files in the display window for the following file types:
dd Files and Cal Files

D Save (to) MOD / Restore (From) MOD


Saves the selected files to the MOD and restores all the dd files from /MOD/ddfiles to /data directory.

D Sort By Date or Sort by Type

The user can perform these functions, except dd math operations, by simply selecting one or more files in the list select
window, and clicking the function button. The following file types are supported in this panel.

D dd File

D Cal File

D Data File

1–74 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-19 SERVICE CALIBRATION

Table 1–18 Service Calibration

Service Calibration Menu Displayed Instruction


(Sequence)
Auto Sequence 1 Air Cal → Phantom Cal
[for CAM Change & Routine Maintenance]
Auto Sequence 2 Q Cal → Air Cal → Phantom Cal
[for Tube/Collimator/Filter/Slice Thickness Change]
Auto Sequence 3 Q Cal → XT Cal → AV Cal → Air Cal → Phantom Cal
[for Detector Change]
Auto Sequence 4 DG Cal → Air Cal → Phantom Cal
[for DAS Change]
Auto Sequence 5 Q Cal → XT Cal → AV Cal → DG Cal → Air Cal → Phantom Cal
[for 1st Installation]
Q Cal –
XT Cal –
AV Cal –
DG Cal –
Asymmetric Seq Q Cal → Air Cal → Phantom Cal [for Asymmetric Option installa-
tion]

D For ‘Auto Sequence 1’ only, 80 kV, 120 kV, or 140 kV can be selected.

Phantom Calibration for Twin System


Because of the X–ray geometry, 10mm Calibration file will be unique vector, and system requires two thickness Cal.
data for Phantom Calibration. 10mm Cal. data is not linear against other thickness Cal files (7, 5,3, etc.).

10mm Calibration Used for 10mm Cal. File only.


7mm Calibration Used for 7, 5,3,2 and 1mm Cal. File.

1–75 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-20 SERVICE MANUAL


The service documentations CD–ROM can be displayed on the CRT of the OC.

1. Insert the Service Documentation CD–ROM into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.

2. Click on Service icon, then select Service Manual.


The start screen of the service manual is displayed on the CRT.

Note
If “Netscape: Not Recommended Browser” window appears, click on Close.

3. Click on (Proceed –>) Main Page to select the Service manuals to be displayed.

4. To exit from the service manual, click the button located at the left upper of screen, then select Close.
The service manual CD–ROM will be ejected automatically from the drive.

Note
For V/R 5.5x or later system, the CD–ROM can not be automatically ejected. So, open a shell window
and enter eject to eject the CD–ROM. Then enter exit to close the shell window.

1–76 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
1-21 SHUTDOWN

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Note

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The Menu filled in yellow stripe below are the Class C tool.

1-21-1 Application Shutdown


Click on Application Shutdown to terminate the application software and enter the desktop menu. By using the
desktop menu, perform the followings:

Desktop Menu System Software Version Descriptions


2.5 3.x 4.0 4.1 or
later
Startup x x x x Terminates the desktop menu and starts up
the application software.
Date setting x x x x Sets the date and time.
Reconfig x x x x Performs system configurations.
Savestate x x x x Saves the system state data in a MOD.
Restorestate x x x Restores the system state data saved by ‘Sa-
vestate’ function.
Install Options x x x x Installs the option key MOD.
List Options x x x x Displays options installed in the system.
Install Software x x Installs revision–up or patch softwares.
Install InSite x x Installs InSite Software.
Install Patch x Installs revision–up or patch softwares.
List S/W Package x Displays versions of Patch and application
softwares.
Shell x x x x Displays the UNIX shell window. You can use
the UNIX commands.
LFW x x x x To perform the LFW procedures.
Logout x x x x Do not click on this button!! If clicked, enter
‘ctuser’ as a login ID and ‘suisei.’ as a pass-
word to return the desktop menu (or scan pan-
el).
Shutdown x x x x Terminates the OS to power OFF the system.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
1-21-2 System Shutdown (For the system V/R 5.5 or later) – Class C

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Click on System Shutdown to shut down the system. The shut–down procedure starts with no inquiry.

1–77 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-22 SYSTEM BROWSER


The System Browser is intended to provide a single point user interface for the review of important system information
to aid evaluation and troubleshooting.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Note
The Menu filled in yellow stripe below are the Class C tool.

Viewer Selections
In the Viewer Selection Area, the user may select one of several system information areas to review.
This selection is made using the ‘Pull Down’ window labeled ‘View:’

D GE System Log
gesyslog

D SYSLOG OC
OC computer IRIX Operating System Log

D IOS LOGS
Application software logs for: Image Browser, Image Database Read Server, Image Database Write Serv-
er, Image Server, DICOM Server, Image Acquisition Server, Networking Server, Film Composer Log,
Printer Server, Archive, Display, Filming.

D Tube Usage
Tube slice count and use information for the current and previous X–Ray Tubes.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D Run Time Statistics (Class C)

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Tube spits, NPR test result, DBPCI test result.

D OC Info.
System software version, Disk usage, Network info., Current Process, Hardware Inventory, OC route
table.

D Configuration Files
OC Host Configuration File, OC Scan Hardware Configuration File.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D History Log (Class C)

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Logs for calibration, analysis, test, etc.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D Software Health Page (Class C)
Files for JEDI error, IOS, etc.

After the Major Area of interest is selected in the ‘View:’ window, you may select one or more of the items displayed
in the ‘Option:’ window directly below the ‘View: Pull Down Window’. This allows more than one group of information
to be viewed together.

1–78 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-22 SYSTEM BROWSER (continued)


After the ‘Option:’ window selects have been made, you may get the selected information from the system by selecting
the button directly to the right of the ‘Option:’ window. The Button name will change depending upon the type of infor-
mation being selected. In the case of the GE System Log the button is labeled RETRIEVE BUFFER PAGE and if the
selection had been Tube Usage the button selections would be SUMMARY, DETAIL, and CUMULATIVE. Each of the
selections will be explained later in this description.

In the Viewer Selection Area you may also enter an alpha–numeric text string to Search for in the currently Displayed
information.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Class C Functions

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D Histogram provides a bar graph histogram of the software processes reporting errors in the GE System
Log. The size of the bars indicates the number of each item that was found in the log.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D Selecting ‘Filter’ and then ‘Histogram’ provides a bar graph of errors in the GE System Log that contain

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
specific alpha–numeric strings. The current strings are: Pri/Most, Pri/Soft, Abort, TAXI, DIP, Filter, Aper-
ture, Converter, ICE CPU, temperature, watchdog, overrun.

GE System Log
The System Browser provides convenient viewing of the scanner primary message log
/usr/g/service/log/gesys_<suite name>_oc.log
After the user selects the GE System Log the entire log is read and divided into ‘pages’ of 1000 lines of messages.
Each ‘page’ of the log is displayed in the ‘Option:’ window with the following format:
Pg # :Day of Week mmm dd hh:mm:ss yyyy
You may then select one or more of the ‘pages’ within the option window and then select ‘Retrieve Buffer Page’. This
allows you to quickly move to a specific Date/Time of interest and avoid having to scroll through parts of the log that
is not of current interest.

Once the Buffer pages have been retrieved, you can search within the currently displayed pages for any alpha–numer-
ic string entered in the Search Field and then selecting the Search Button. The search field is case sensitive. Depend-
ing upon the selections for: Next, Previous, First, Last the viewer will display the Next, Previous, First, or Last occur-
rence of the Search String. Selecting Search Again will take you to the Next or Previous occurrence if those selections
had been made.

The Search feature will also display how many of occurrences of the Search string where found in that section(s) of
the log. The information is displayed in the User Message Area at the bottom of the window in the form of:
Search Status: Found XX match(s) of <search string>

1–79 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-22 SYSTEM BROWSER (continued)

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Class C Histogram and Filter Function for GE System Log

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
In addition to the standard viewing and search functions described above, the System Browser allows you to pro-

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
duce a Histogram of the entire gesyslog and display the results in a graphical, bar chart format. An additional feature

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
is to first apply a fixed filter to the entire gesyslog and then produce a graphical histogram of the filtered results.
Additional Histogram and Filter Functions are planned to be added in later software releases based upon your and

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
engineering’s inputs.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D Histogram

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
If the ‘Histogram’ button is selected, the System Browser processes the entire gesyslog, not just the

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
buffer pages currently being viewed. The current Histogram processing counts the number of times that
individual software processes (programs) log messages to the gesyslog.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The Histogram includes two different pieces of information for each line reported in the graph.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
– The name of the item(s) found during the generation of the Histogram. In this example the

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
names of the processes reporting messages to the log are displayed next to the number of oc-
currences in the form <process name>. The process names are the names reported in the ge-

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
syslog Process: field.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
– A bar graph showing the relative number of occurrences for the found items in descending order

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
from the most number found to the least number found.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D Filter (Filtered Histogram)

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
If the ‘Filter Check Box’ is selected and then the ‘Histogram Button’, the System Browser will first apply

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
a filter to the gesyslog and then produce a Histogram of that result.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The current fixed filter is a list of ‘key word strings’. In the future we will add additional filter sets based
upon field and engineering inputs.

SYSLOG – OC
When you select either SYSLOG OC, the System Browser will display the IRX SYSLOG Files on the respective com-
puter. These are the logs normally found at /var/adm on the OC system.

Once again you may select one or more of the log files to view in the Options: window and then select the View File
Button to retrieve and display the requested information. The Search and Next, Previous, First and Last functions
operate the same as for the basic gesyslog viewer.

IOS Logs
The IOS log files are created and updated by various scanner application software processes.
These processes include: Image Browser, Image Database Read Server, Image Database Write Server, Image Serv-
er, DICOM Server, Image Acquisition Server, Networking Server, Film Composer Log, Printer Server, Archive, Dis-
play, and Filming.

The System Browser has the same operation and capabilities as those for viewing the IRIX SYSLOG files.

1–80 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-22 SYSTEM BROWSER (continued)

Tube Usage
The System Browser is used to display information about the currently installed tube as well as previously installed
tubes. The Tube Usage viewer provides three different levels of information viewing for Tube Usage: Summary, De-
tails, and Cumulative.

Note
For Tube Warranty purposes ‘Warranty Effective Slices’ is the correct number to report upon tube
unit failure.

D Tube Usage Details Information


The Tube Usage Details information identifies the selected Tube Unit and Site Information plus details on
the types and number of scans taken on that tube unit.

D Tube Usage Cumulative Information


The Tube Usage Cumulative Information displays the totaled tube usage information for all tubes
that have been installed on the system.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Run Time Stats – Class C

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The system Browser allows you to display statistical information gather by different subsystems in the scanner.
Unlike the other viewers only one category may be selected at a time for display.

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Currently the System Browser can display the following information under Run Time Stats:Tube spits, NPR test

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
result, DBPCI test result.

OC Info
The title for this section may be a little misleading so take a look at the capabilities that the System Browser can provide
to you in this area.

The System Browser has the capability of running some of the routinely used IRIX commands used
in gathering data about the system operation and configuration as well as reporting some of the
specific scanner configuration files.

Note that multi–select is available in the ‘Option:’ Window. Note also that the Search Function is available.
The command results available in this area are:

D System Software Revisions:showprods

D Disk Usage: df

D OC Network Sockets:netstat –ian

D OC Route Table: netstat –r

D OC Network Configuration:ifconfig

D OC Current Processes Running:ps –aef

D OC Hardware Inventory:hinv

1–81 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-22 SYSTEM BROWSER (continued)

Config Files
The System Browser has the capability of viewing some of the routinely referenced scanner configuration files used
in gathering data about the system:
Info file, OC host.cfg, OC scanrecon.cfg, OC option.cfg, etc..

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
History Log – Class C

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The System Browser has the capability of viewing some history log files:
Alignment, Service Calibration, User calibration, CT number adjustment, Tube warmup, Gravity sag, Heat soak,

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Image analysis, JEDI diag, DAS transfer test, DAS linearity test, POST recon test, InSite activity, etc..

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Software Health Page – Class C

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
The System Browser has the capability of viewing some log files:

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
JEDI error, assoc_out, caldate, corefilelist, ermes, gesys.log, hast_report, hiv_inv, ios logs, least 15, login_logout,
message_report, module, OC_SYSLOG, process, readme, reli_number, reli_report, starup_shutdown, swHealth-

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Page.log, swinfo, top15, etc..

1–82 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-23 TUBE PRO. (NOFILM, CHANGE)


IMPORTANT NOTE:
This procedure is provided for the single detector system.

It will take approx. two hours to complete adjustments.

1. Select Service Menu → Tube Pro. (NoFilm, Change)

2. Tube procedure tool will execute.


If you have already initialized Tube Filament Aging Data, click on OK.
If it does not, click on Cancel then perform CLEAR FILAMENT AGING, using Service Menu –> Generator test.

3. Enter Tube Insert Serial Number (Not Housing Serial Number), then click on OK.

4. Follow the procedures that appear on the CRT screen. The following adjustments will be performed.

D Tube POR Alignment:


For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, POR Except for Twin System.

D Tube BOW Alignment:


For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, BOW Except for Twin System.

D Tube ISO Alignment:


For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, ISO Center Alignment.

D Q calibration:
For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, System Calibration, HiLight Calibration.

D Bowtie Filter Alignment:


For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, Filter Alignment.

D Auto Sequence 1 (Air and Phantom cal):


For detailed procedures, refer to Section 1-19 Service Calibration.

D Quick CT # Adjustment

1–83 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-24 TUBE PRO. (NOFILM, MFG.)


IMPORTANT NOTE:
This procedure is provided for the single detector system.

This tool can perform full calibrations as follows: (Mainly used at manufacturing line)

D Tube POR Alignment

D Tube BOW Alignment

D Gravity SAG

D Tube Rough ISO Alignment

D Radial Alignment

D Tube ISO Alignment

D Q–cal

D XT–cal

D AV–cal

D DG–cal

D Bowtie Filter Alignment

D Auto Sequence 1 (Air and Phantom Cal)

D Quick CT # Adjustment

1–84 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-25 TUBE PROCEDURE (CHANGE)


IMPORTANT NOTE:
This procedure is provided for the Twin detector system.

Prior to starting Tube Procedure (change)


1. Checking the Aperture Home Position:

a. Attach a tape as a mark onto the motor drive pulley to read a number of rotation of the collimator Z–axis drive
motor.

Mark (tape)
Nearly aligned

b. Press the OGP reset switch to drive the collimator Z–axis drive motor.

Push this reset SW.

OGP BOARD

c. Verify that:
–The aperture moves smoothly.
–The mark, attached in step a, rotates approx. 3 times CW, 6 times CCW, and 3 times CW, then the aperture
stop moving.

d. Verify that the aperture front surface is NEARLY aligned with the front surface of the collimator case. (See the
photograph above.)

1–85 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-25 TUBE PROCEDURE (CHANGE) (continued)


2. Checking for the Aperture Z–Axis Zigzag motion:

a. Select Service –> Offline Scan.

b. Perform one off–line scan (Stationary, 1sec,100mA, 1mm, Small Focus, T/G control → Auto Collimator:ON)
with the bow–tie filter installed. (This scan is performed to move the collimator so that X–ray beam is evenly
exposed for both A and B channels.)
After scanning, do not exit from the Off–line scan screen.

c. Set the Zigzag motion for the collimator aperture:

D For V/R 5.5x or later system:


Select Offline Scan –> T/G Control –> CIF mode –> ZIGZAG.

D For V/R 5.0x system:


Switch OFF ‘Rotate’ breaker at the Gantry rear base and open the left DAS cover.
Set the bit switch 3 of the SW2 to the ON position as shown.
Then switch ON ‘Rotate’ breaker.
ON

O
N
1

2
3

4
5

7
8
SW2

BEAM TRACKING CONTROL

d. Perform one off–line scan (Stationary, 1sec,100mA, 1mm, Small Focus, T/G control → Auto Collimator:OFF)
with the bow–tie filter installed.

e. Select Service –> Generic System Analyzer –> Format Raw Data –> A side.

f. Select the raw data file (of the last scan performed in step d) from the Raw data browser lists.

Perform Fan Data with the following settings, then click on OK:

Offset File Correction Yes


Reference Correction No
Natural Log Conversion No

Select Original as “Select Type of Data:”.

Select Store to File.

Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and A ch as “File Comment”, then click on OK.

1–86 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-25 TUBE PROCEDURE (CHANGE) (continued)


g. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and select B side and repeat step f to make
MeanFile 2 – B ch.
h. Select Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis → Calculations → Raw/Raw. Op.
i. Select A+B from ‘Select Operation:’.
Select SvSupRaw 1–Ach as Raw Data File A.

Select SvSupRaw 2–Bch as Raw Data File B.


Enter 3 as “Output Raw File Number” and A + B as “Comment”, then click on OK.
j. Repeat step i to make SvSupRaw 4 – A–B by selecting ‘A–B’ as ‘Select Operation:’.
k. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation:’.
l. Select SvSupRaw 4–A–B as Raw Data File A.

Select SvSupRaw 3–A+B as Raw Data File B.


m. Enter 5 as “Output Raw File Number” and A–B/A+B as “Comment”, then click on OK.
n. Select Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →
View Raw Data.
o. Select SvSupRaw 5– A–B/A+B as “Select SupRaw File:”.
p. Click on [Cursor], then set the cursor to View=1 and Channel=826.
q. Click on [Plot].
r. Select ‘Vertical Profile’.
Select ‘Manual Scale.’
Enter –1 for Data Min.
Enter 1 for Data Max.
Click on OK.
A graph like in Illustration below is drawn.

Normal

Abnormal

An acute angle must be


displayed.

–1 –0.5 0 0.5 1

1–87 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-25 TUBE PROCEDURE (CHANGE) (continued)


s. Set the SW2 on the CIF Board to the original position (all to OFF) and install the DAS cover.

t. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.

Starting Tube Procedure (change)


It will take approx. two hours to complete adjustments.

1. Select Service Menu → Tube Procedure (change)

2. Tube procedure tool will execute.


If you have already initialized Tube Filament Aging Data, click on OK.
If it does not, click on Cancel then perform CLEAR FILAMENT AGING, using Service Menu –> Generator test.

3. Enter Tube Insert Serial Number (Not Housing Serial Number), then click on OK.

4. Follow the procedures that appear on the CRT screen. The following adjustments will be performed.

D POR Alignment:
For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, POR for Twin System.

D BOW Alignment:
For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, BOW for Twin System.

D Q cal Cannel Ratio:


For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, Qcal Channel Ratio.

D ISO Alignment:
For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, ISO Center Alignment.

D Q calibration:
For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, System Calibration, HiLight Calibration.

D Bowtie Filter Alignment:


For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, X–ray alignment, Filter Alignment.

D Auto Sequence 1:
For detailed procedures, refer to Section 1-19 Service Calibration.

D CT # Adjustment:
For detailed procedures, refer to FCA, System, System Calibration, CT Number Adjustment.

1–88 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-26 TUBE PROCEDURE (MFG.)


IMPORTANT NOTE:
This procedure is provided for the Twin detector system.

This tool can perform full calibrations as follows: (Mainly used at manufacturing line)

D POR

D BOW

D Qcal channel Ratio

D Gravity SAG

D Rough ISO Alignment

D Radial Alignment

D ISO Alignment

D Q–cal

D XT–cal

D AV–cal

D DG–cal

D Bowtie Filter Alignment

D Auto Sequence 1

D CT Number Adjustment

1–89 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-27 UPDATE SYSTEM LOG


The following logs can be updated by this menu.

D ‘Tube Usage’, ‘Tube Spits’, ‘Bad Raw’

NOTICE
When updating system log(s), reboot the system to enable a newly created file.

1–90 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-28 USER PREFERENCE


The following can be set in this menu.

1–91 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

1-29 VECTOR CONVERT

Table 1–19 Vector Convert

Parameter to be Specified Selectable Parameter


Generation Current, Previous, 2Before, 3Before, ... , 9Before
(When ‘Warmup Whole’ is se-
lected for ‘Vector’ only)

Store from (arbitrary)

Vector Warmup Whole, Warmup History, Hilight, Air & Ptm


Item Mean, 1/Mean, SD, SD/Mean, Ratio, HPFratio, AP chk0, AP
(When ‘Warmup History’ is se- chk90, AP chk180, AP chk270, stRatio, filstRatio
lected for ‘Vector’ only)
kV, Thickness, Cal.FOV, Fo- (kV), (Thickness), (Cal.FOV), (Focus)
cus
(When ‘Air & Ptm’ is selected
for ‘Vector’ only)

How to Use
1. Specify the parameters described in Table 1–19.

2. Click [Convert vector].

3. Click [Show contents].

The following is displayed.

Table 1–20 ‘Show contents’

Vector Displayed Information


Warmup Whole Date & Time
Warmup History Date & Time
Hilight Date & Time, (others)
Air & Ptm Date & Time, beta, gamma, (others)

1–92 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

SECTION 2 – MESSAGE DISPLAY

2-1 MESSAGE DESKTOP


When an error occurs, the system gives an alert sound, and displays a message on the message bar. See Illustration
2–1.
Click the message bar to display the message desktop and to see more messages if any. The screen only shows
messages which are current. To see the message log, click [View Log].

Illustration 2–1 Message Desktop

Monitor Screen

Scan Display ImageWorks

Service Shutdown

Idle
Attach in progress
Network status
Filming Status

Message Bar
Current Messages

Clear View Log Close Memo Update


(dimmed) (dimmed)

Message Desktop

2–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

2-1 MESSAGE DESKTOP (continued)

Viewing Level
Click [Select Viewing Level] to show a pop–up menu for a Viewing Level selection. Refer to Illustration 2–2 and Table
2–1.

Illustration 2–2 Message Log Report

Message Desktop

Message Log Report

Select
Viewing
Level

Table 2–1 Selection of Viewing Level

Viewing Level Description


(Pop–up Menu)
All All messages are displayed.
Operator Messages for operators are displayed.
Service Messages for service engineers are displayed.
Support Messages for software engineers are displayed.

2–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

2-2 ERROR LOG VIEWER MESSAGE FORMAT


1. Following is the general format of message which you can see on Error Log viewer. Error code is assigned as unique
number in one software version but this may be different if software version is different.

Process name which


Date output this message
Host name of this system

Tue Apr 18 13:30:02 2000


Host:ctbay01 Proc:scanRx Error:200109155
File:UIRx.cxx Line:10653
Function : Data Acquisition : OC Processing
Start : Prospective Exam : 415 : Protocol : 1.

Error code which is assigned


Explanation
for this software

2. In case error is from Table/Gantry, including JEDI and DAS, there are 3 types of explanation format:

(1) XG error
On V/R4.10 or later, JEDI detail error code is on Error Log viewer(gesyslog) in case that error causes scan stop. It
means errors higher than Class3 is displayed there. This is common between V/R4.xx software and V/R5.xx soft-
ware. See X–ray Generator Section for detail.

Fri Apr 28 18:25:02 2000


Host:ctbay10 Proc:tgp_out Error:186218
XG Error.
Phase is 2 code is 50.
Detail error code : 50–0212H
Heater Error : MAINS_DROP detected..

2–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

2-2 ERROR LOG VIEWER MESSAGE FORMAT (continued)


(2) Except XG Error on V/R4.13 or before
You can find more detail explanation for each errors on Advanced Diagnostics TAB.

What kind of errors happened.

Wed Apr 12 13:38:45 2000


Host:ctbay07 Proc:tgp_out Error:186403
Cradle Error.
SW/HW Error: TGP Error Detected.
code is 2

Detail error code in Cradle Error. Who detects the error.


‘TGP Error Detected’ means
TGP detects the error.

(3) Except XG Error on V/R5.00 or later


Error Code which is assigned to identify error is unique even if software version is different. All of errors have the
information who detects error and detail explanation to help you understand the situation.

What kind of errors happened. Error Code which is assigned to identify errors

Fri Apr 28 20:30:07 2000


Host:ctbay10 Proc:tgp_out Error:186327
Cradle Error.
Code:12–1030–02
Error detected by : TGP(TP)
Cradle unlatch was detected on CRADLE CMD.

Who detects the error Detail explanation of this error.

2–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

2-2 ERROR LOG VIEWER MESSAGE FORMAT (continued)


Error Code format is as below.

Detail Error Code.

Code:12 – 1030 – 02

Who detects the error. What kind of error happened


Error or Information, 1 is Error and 0 is Information.

List of code who detects the error.


11 TGP(MP)
12 TGP(TP)
13 TGP(GP)
20 OGP
30 CIF(DAS)
40 kV Control(JEDI)

2–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

2–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

SECTION 3 – UNIX COMMANDS

3-1 UNIX COMMANDS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING


For other Unix commands or detailed information, refer to Section 4, Irix Guide.

3-1-1 Disk Usage Information


Enter the following command in the Unix shell to display the disk usage information.

$ df

3-1-2 Recovery
The following commands will restart the process without performing system shutdown.

Command Description
(in the Unix Shell) If the display (autoview portion) process is crashed, it can be
/usr/g/bin/restartDisplay restarted with this command.
(You can also use a command from the Display or Image-
Works desktop menu.)
(from the ImageWorks desktop menu) If the browser process is crashed, it can be restarted with this
restartBrowser command.

3-1-3 Software Problem


→ Just write SPR (Service Problem Report) with reproducible operation as detailed as possible.

3–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-4 How to Collect Log (SnapState)


Just do SnapState to collect all the necessary logs. (error logs, core files, timer logs, etc.)
SnapState saves log files either hard disk or MOD.
Select “Snap State” from Utility menu on Service desktop. Or,
Enter the following command in shell.

$ SnapState

SnapState Option Function


No Option same function as “–c”.
–M Save to MOD automatically, no prompt.
–a Run in fully automated mode (HAST).
–c Use createTracebacks. This creates traceback file from core and remove core.
–f Forced remove without save or information, use is NOT asked for permission.
–h Describe usage of SnapState.
–i Save log files only (InSite mode).
–m Forces special message used by autostart and changes default answers to
questions.
–s Run in silent mode, no questions.
–sl Storelog mode, no user input.
–REMOVE Forced remove with save and information.
–SAVE Forced save.

Here is a list of files which SnapState stores.


Store Path: /MOD/<hostname>.<datetime> ... in case of MOD
/usr/sc/log/<hostname>.<datetime>.tar ... in case of disk

3–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-4 How to Collect Log (SnapState) (continued)


Files to be stored:

/usr/g/bin/core*
/usr/g/service/log/core*
/usr/g/service/core/core*
/usr/tmp/core*
/usr/g/service /Sv*
/usr/g/service /gesys_<hostname>.log
/usr/g/service /exam*.protocol (not available now)
/usr/g/service /exam*.scan.request (not available now)
/var/adm/SYSLOG
/var/adm/crash/*
/usr/g/ctuser/logfiles/*log
/tmp/*.log* (result of /usr/g/srtools/getLogScanRecon)
/tmp/recon_q* (result of /usr/g/srtools/getLogScanRecon)
/tmp/rawctrl* (result of /usr/g/srtools/getLogScanRecon)
/tmp/acq.req (result of /usr/g/srtools/RawPrmtrDisp)
/tmp/scan.req (result of /usr/g/srtools/ScanPrmtrDisp)
/tmp/recon.req (result of /usr/g/srtools/ReconPrmtrDisp)
ps.info (result of ‘ps –efl’)
df.info (result of ‘df’)
hw.info (result of ‘hinv’)
dasm.info (result of ‘showdasm’)
SHOWPRODS (result of ‘showprods’)
/VERSION

3–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-4 How to Collect Log (SnapState) (continued)

Table 3–1 Log Files

Category Directory Filename Description


Generator /usr/g/service/log/ generatorTest.log It is log file of generatorTest.

/usr/g/service/log/ JEDIerror.log It is made by ‘Error log retrieve’ in generatorTest. It


includes only retrieved data from JEDI.

/usr/g/service/log/ JEDIerror.log.detail It is made by ‘Error log retrieve’ in generatorTest. It


is derived from JEDIerror.log with detail error de-
scription.

Tube /usr/g/service/log/ SvTubeUsage.log Tube Usage file of current one.

SvTubeUsage.log.old1 Last Tube Usage file. There are files from old1 to
old5. It means system can have last 5 tube usage
log files. New one will be created by using ‘create’
function.

/usr/g/service/log/SvTubeSpits01/ 0x.log Tube Spits Log file. 01.log is spits log file for 1st
10kslices. Sequential files, ex, 02.log, 03.log, etc
will be created along with slice increase. SVTubeS-
pits02 directory will be created when TubeSpitsLog
are created by using ‘create’ function.

Bad Raw Log /usr/g/service/log/SvBadRaw01/ 0x.log Bad Raw log file. Management is same as Tube
Spits Log file. Do not have create functionality.

Results of Diag- /usr/g/service/log/ das_test_log Log of DAS Transfer Test


nostics
/usr/g/service/log/ postrectest_image_err.log* Log of Auto Post Recon Test

/usr/g/insite/ modemsetup.log Log of Modem setup (result of installmodem)

/var/adm/ pppd.log* PPP daemon

/usr/g/insite/ProDiags/ ProDiags_<hostname>.log Prodiags

/usr/g/insite/ProDiags/healthpage/ results directory. Healthpage (does not produce any logs but the
healthpage itself is generated in)

/usr/g/service/log/ poweron.log Power On Test Log. Overwritten when power on


test is proceeded.

/usr/g/diag/log hw_TestLogs Summary of Off LineTest result. Results are ap-


pended, not overwritten. This file is automatically
divided and create .bak file when the size is over
50kByte at the start timing of Off Line Test.

Core File /usr/g/service/log/ gesys_hostname.log Error log file which can be observed on Message
Viewer. This file is automatically divided and create
compressed gz file when the size is over 3 or 4
MBytes at bootup.

/var/adm/ install.report Log file of software installation.

/var/adm/ SYSLOG System Log file which is related to OS.

/usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Log files which is related to IOS.

3–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-5 How to Display History Log (For V/R 4.13 or later)


The history log files are stored under /usr/g/config/history directory. Displaying these files allows you to understand
what kind of activities has been done on the system. The history log to be stored:
D CTnumAdj.log
D alignment.log
D serviceCal.log
D DASlinear.log
D gsag.log
D serviceMenu.log
D DASxfer.log
D heatSoak.log
D updateLog.log
D MTFsurvey.log
D iipenv.log.Z
D userCal.log
D SelectSaveState.log
D jediDiag.log
D warmUp.log
D TubeProcedure.log
D postRecon.log

To display the contents of these file, use tail command.


Following is an example for alignment.log. Tail command with –xx option will be useful to see latest status. xx is the
number of lines from the bottom of the file.

$ tail –10 alignment.log

Thu Feb 1 11:40:52 2001;Phantom centering;Move Phantom RIGHT 0.13 mm (< 0.15)
Thu Feb 1 11:40:56 2001;Air scan;start
Thu Feb 1 11:41:16 2001;alignment.log;End
Thu Feb 1 14:30:47 2001;alignment.log;Start
Thu Feb 1 14:30:58 2001;Air scan;start
Thu Feb 1 14:32:47 2001;Phantom centering;Move Phantom DOWN 0.73 mm (< 0.15)
Thu Feb 1 14:32:47 2001;Phantom centering;Move Phantom RIGHT 1.55 mm (< 0.15)
Thu Feb 1 14:33:31 2001;Phantom centering;Move Phantom DOWN 0.27 mm (< 0.15)
Thu Feb 1 14:33:31 2001;Phantom centering;Move Phantom RIGHT 0.12 mm (< 0.15)
Thu Feb 1 14:33:49 2001;alignment.log;End

3–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-6 How to Use MOD


You have to initialize MOD if it is new one. You can initialize either mkfsMOD command or Initialize MOD under Raw
Functions.
You can not initialize Image MOD by using the above command to avoid accidental image data loss. Before you use
MOD, you should mount MOD using mountMOD command.

$ mountMOD

Then MOD is mounted on /MOD directory. You can copy files or log to MOD using standard unix command.
Before eject MOD, you should unmount MOD using unmountMOD.

$ unmountMOD

You can not unmount it if you are working on /MOD directory. In this case, change the working directory and retry.

3-1-7 How to Display Cooling Trend


At the present, no tube anode/case temperature are not displayed on the screen. However, you can set it by running
the following scripts after perform application shutdown.

$ /usr/g/srtools/setCoolingTrend

Then start up the system. After start–up, enter the following command to display console window.

$ startconsole

Tube Anode and Case temperature is displayed on the console window.


Note: This is for debug use only and not designed for customer use.
To turn it off, run the following scripts after application shutdown and start up the system again.

$ /usr/g/srtools/unsetCoolingTrend

3–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

Using the Tube Temperature (For Version 6.xx or later system)


The tube temperature view can be used without performing application shutdown.

1. Select Service –> shell.

2. Enter tubeTempViewer. The following window appears so that you can find about current Anode and Case tem-
peratures.

3. Click on Quit to terminate the Tube Temperature Viewer.

3-1-8 How to Rise the Tube Temperature to 100 %


To reset a cooling algorithm, rise the tube temperature (Case and Anode) to 100%.
Enter the following command in shell.

$ TubeTempMax

Note
Once the temperature rises to 100%, you must wait approximately 20 minutes for scanning.

3-1-9 How to Install SMPTE and QA Images


There is functions to install these images for reference. Select Install SMPTE from Utility Menu on Service Desktop.
Then both images are installed.

SMPTE Image
Exam# 1000, 1 image, Set WW = 1024 WL = 300 to see.

QA Images
Exam# 273, 6 images.
Note: In fact this is not right image for QA Images.

3–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-10 How to Change AutoVoice, X–ray Buzzer Sounds


On Service desktop, select Audio Control under Service Adjustment Menu. You can adjust the following parameters.

X–ray Buzzer: Volume, Pitch, Length


Alert Buzzer: Volume, Pitch, Length
AutoVoice: Volume
CD sound: Volume

3-1-11 How to Change Image Direction


On Service desktop, select User Preferences under Utilities Menu. You can change the following parameters. * is
default.

AXIAL IMAGE DIRECTION:


From Gantry Front, From Gantry Back, *From Head Front, From Head Back

APEX SCOUT DIRECTION:


Gantry Upper, Gantry Lower, *Head Upper, Head Lower

LATERAL SCOUT DIRECTION:


GAntry Left, Gantry Right, *Head Left, Head Right

After you change this preferences, you need to restart the system to take an effect.

3-1-12 How to Change Image Annotation


There are four levels of annotation

Full, Partial, None, Customize

You can change it in Annotation Level on Display Preferences on Display desktop. For information, the followings are
site specific one and normally they are set during LFC or reconfig by service engineer. It is stored in /usr/g/config/
host.cfg.

Hospital Name, Station Name

3–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-13 How to Change Display Gamma


Sometimes you need to change display gamma level to make film image close to what you see on the display.

$ gamma <gamma value>

Default gamma value is 1.7 and you may need to change it to value between 1.0 and 1.7.
You need to be root user to change it.

3-1-14 How to Restart Process


You can confirm the state f process by using cupShutdown command. cupShutdown command output is displayed
on the console window. So before doing this command, you should start the console window using ‘startconsole’ com-
mand.

To check state of precess:

$ cupShutdown dump

To stop the process

$ cupShutdown stop <process name>

To start the process

$ cupShutdown start <process name>

To restart (stop & start) process

$ cupShutdown restart <process name>

Keep in mind that some of process such as UIF process may not start up correctly. All the process except patient UIF
may be able to be restarted by this command.

3-1-15 How to Delete All Recon Queues


Sometimes we need to clean up all recon queues for some troubleshooting. Please keep in mind that this operation
deletes all the recon queues including prospective, retrospective recons.

$ cd /usr/g/reon_q

$ rm –f reon_q*

And restart the system.

3–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-16 How to Change Exhibition Mode, Stand Alone Mode


This is special mode for exhibition or demo console. This feature is not fully guaranteed, so please use it on your own
risk. And DO NOT TRY it on the customer machine, or you will be in trouble.

<Exhibition Mode>
You can control table/gantry and pretend to take scan (DynePlan etc.). But no x–ray is exposed and no autoview is
done.

To turn it on,

$ /usr/g/srtools/setWithoutAutoView

And restart the system.

To turn it off,

$ /usr/g/srtools/unsetWithoutAutoView

And restart the system.

<Demo Console Mode>

To turn it on,

$ /usr/g/srtools/setScanSimulator

And restart the system.

To turn it off,

$ /usr/g/srtools/unsetScanSimulator

3–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-17 How to Perform Z–axis Collimation Diagnostics


You can check if the collimator correctly moves in Z–axis direction.

1. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:

> collimatorDiag <Enter>


Collimator Works!
>

Verify that:
– The aperture moves smoothly.
– The collimator performs initial operation: The drive motor pulley rotates CW 3 times,
then CCW 6 times, and lastly CW 3 times, then the aperture stop moving.
– “Collimator Works!” is displayed.

> exit <Enter> (To terminate the unix shell window.)

Collimator Z–axis drive motor

3–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-18 How to Change the Artifact Correction Mode


The small DFOV target recon artifact (star artifact) might appears when performing Retro Recon with small DFOV.
For the system with V/R 6.03 or later, its artifact can be corrected.

No correction “Disable” is set as a default, but the following procedure can be changed to “Enable”.
“Enable” can eliminate the artifact, but resolution becomes slightly low.

Illustration 3–1 Example of Target Recon Artifact

Artifact

NOTICE
The “Enable” information is NOT saved using Savestate. Since “Enable” is returned auto-
matically to “Disable” after performing LFC/LFW, the correction mode MUST be changed.

3–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

3-1-18 How to Change the Artifact Correction Mode (Continued)

Checking Correction Mode


1. Select Service –> shell

2. Enter cd /usr/sc/nrebin

3. Enter ls –l

4. Check if the file with the arrow (–>) displayed below has “dis” or “ena”.

dis or ena Current Status


dis No Corrected
ena Corrected

dis : No corrected
File with the arrow (–>) ena : Corrected

Note: The file name might be slightly different according to the system.

Changing Correction Mode


1. Select Service –> shell

2. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts.

% su <Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>

3. Enter the following to change correction mode.

Command Description Remarks


enableCorrection Changed to ena (enable) mode The first “C” of “Correction” only
is in uppercase.
enableCorrection –disable Changed to dis (disable) mode The first “C” of “Correction” only
is in uppercase.
One space input is required be-
tween inputs of “enableCorrec-
tion” and “–disable”.)

3–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

3–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

SECTION 4 – IRIX GUIDE

NOTICE
This Section for Reference Only
Not under Revision Control

4-1 INTRODUCTION
Do not be afraid to try an old Sun UNIX command. Some of these still work in the SGI environment.

Conventions
Bold Face: Cross referenced links and system messages or prompts.
Italics: Variables you need to fill the real thing in for (e. g., filename).
Normal: Command syntax, purpose descriptions and paths.
No path – means that the executable is contained in the usr/g/bin directory and can be executed from anywhere.
(login useraccount) indicates who you have to be to perform the command listed, when none is indicated, you can
run the command from any user account.

Table 4–1 User Accounts and Passwords

User Account Password


insite 2getin
root #bigguy
ctuser (OC Only) suisei.
service no password

4–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

4-2 IRIX OPERATING COMMANDS

Table 4–2 Irix Operating Commands

Command Purpose
!! Repeat last command issued (see history).
!X Repeat command indicated by number for X. (see his-
tory).
!X Repeat last command issued from history list which
begins with letter(s) indicated by X (see history).
<CTRL>+c Terminate current process.
<CTRL>+d Logout of user account.
<CTRL>+z End input.
alias Display a list of all aliased commands.
arp –a Display current arp (address resolution protocol) cache
in memory. Will let you know who is in the current net-
work routing table.
cd /directoryname/directoryname/ . . . Change current working directory to that specified in
/directoryname/directoryname/ . . .
chmod XXX filename Change the permissions to XXX for filename.
XXX is an octal number whose value determines read,
write and executable status bits for a files permissions.
drwxrwxrwx owneraccount size date filename
– 111 111 111 ==> chmod 777 filename
The first four bits are owner permissions, second are
group permissions, and the third is everyone’s permis-
sions.
chown useraccount filename Change filename ownership to useraccount.
cp /path/filename /path/filename Copy the designated file to the destination indicated.
date MMddhhmmyy Set the date and time as specified: MM is month, dd is
day, hh is hour, mm is minute, yy is year. Must be root.
df –k Display disk partition sizes. Will also display mounted
file systems.
dkstat Provide ongoing I/O statistics for all SCSI devices.
du Display block size of current directory.
du –sk Display block size of current directory and its contents.
eject SCSI Id Ejects the SCSI Id specified.
find / –name “filename” –print Locate filename and print its path searching the entire
directory structure for which this account has permis-
sions (login as root to catch them all).

4–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 4–2 Irix Operating Commands (continued)

Command Purpose
fsck Run disk maintenance, answer yes to all questions it
asks. If it asks questions, reboot when it is complete
and repeat until it runs clean (login root). If system
boots to single user UNIX (#):
#cd /etc <enter>
#fsck<enter>
Output – questions are likely.
#reboot<enter>
(see cd).
ftp internet address File transfer protocol. Will connect to host designated
by internet address. Login will be required. Most file
system navigation will function normally. Other com-
mands available include:
• get filename–transfer filename from internet address
to current directory on log host.
• put filename–transfer filename to internet address
from log host.
• bye–logout of internet address and exit ftp.
• ?–display all available commands
fx Disk utility. Can be used to slip bad blocks. See Using
fx to Slip Bad Blocks.
grep text filename Search filename for any occurrences of text and print
the line that contains it. Can also be used as a destina-
tion for a pipe as in: ps –ef | grep text
history Provides a list of all commands issued since login for
current account. Use in conjunction with repeat com-
mand feature (!) to reissue same command.
kill processid Terminate process indicated by processid (see ps –
ef).
killall processname Sends a shutdown signal to all software processes e
if no process name is specified or to the named
process.
ln –s destinationfilename filename Create a symbolic link between destinationfilename
and filename. All output from filename will go to des-
tinationfilename.
ls –alR List current and all subdirectory contents.
mkdir directoryname Create directoryname as a branch from the current
directory.
more textfilename Show the contents of textfilename a page at a time.
Can also act as the destination of a pipe as in: tail
–100 SYSLOG | more.

4–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 4–2 Irix Operating Commands (continued)

Command Purpose
mount device directory This will display a table of mounted file systems with
no device directory designation. By specifying a device
and directory name, you can create a virtual partition
that will allow you to work with the media in the device.
(see umount)
netstat –ain View network performance statistics. Collision rates
from 3 to 5% will cause system performance degrada-
tion.
netstat –r View physically connected hosts on your net and the
current network routing tables.
Destination – direct connection (no router)
Gateway – gate to destination
Flags:
• U – up
• H – host
• G – gateway
• Note: current log host will show no flags.
refcnt – current number of active uses per route
Use – number of packets sent per route
nvram Display current prom monitor settings.
ping Host Function is similar to spray. Send a 64 byte packet to
Host and have it return that packet. Provide statistics
on status of transmission.
prtvtoc Print out the root disk label.
prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/dksod[n]s0 Display partitions, sizes and SCSI controller informa-
tion for SCSI disk. Must be root. ([n] is the SCSI de-
vice number).
ps –ef Display running software processes.
ps –ef | grep ‘whoami‘ | more Display all processes your current user account owns
that are running.
pwd Display current directory path.
reboot Shutdown and restart IRIX.
rm –r directoryname Delete directory contents and then directoryname.
rm filename Delete filename.
sum filename This command will generate a checksum value for file-
name. Use it to verify that the file you have remote
copied or transmitted is the same as the original. Sum
will produce the same result if it is.
swap –s View available system swap space.
tail –f textfilename Displays an ongoing update of textfilename. Useful for
observing system startup as in:
tail –f gesys_<suiteid>_OC0.log

4–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 4–2 Irix Operating Commands (continued)

Command Purpose
tail –X textfilename Show the last X lines of textfilename.
telnet internetaddress Attempt to log into remote host designated by internet-
address.
top –i second Display processes having the highest CPU usage up-
dating every second.
touch filename Create filename of zero length.
umount filesystemname or directoryname This command will release a directory or file system.
Use it to release a 3rd party mount chewing that is
virtually chewing up root partition space. See mount
and df.
w What user accounts are active and what actions are
they performing. Will show how long the ctuser c–shell
has been up.
whoami Print current userid.

4–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

4-3 LOG FILES

Table 4–3 Log Files

Log File Host Path Description


analysis.0 OC /var/adm/crash Provides a summary of all
of the CPU activity, failure
reason and executable in-
volved in a CPU Panic.
View it using more.
aqslog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Acquisition server log file.
View it using tail or more.
arslog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Archive server log file.
View it using tail or more.
browserlog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Browser client log file.
View it using tail or more.
dbrlog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Image database read
server log file. View it us-
ing tail or more.
dbwlog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Image database write
server log file. View it us-
ing tail or more.
dcslog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Dicom server log file. View
it using tail or more.
dks1d1s[n] OC /etc/fscklogs Contains the results of the
fsck performed at startup
for SCSI device indicated
by [n]. (see CT/i De-
vices).
gesys_<suite>_OC0.log OC /usr/g/service/log This is the same log you
would get at in applica-
tions by hitting the mes-
sage bar. Examine it at
IRIX level using the view-
log command. Just about
everything reports here,
so it is the logical place to
start troubleshooting.
host.cfg OC /usr/g/config Host configuration file.
Use more to view this file.
Not all parameters are
used from this file.

4–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 4–3 Log Files (continued)

Log File Host Path Description


imslog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Image server log file. View
it using tail or more.
INFO OC /usr/g/config/INFO This file contains the sys-
tem environment informa-
tion. Use more to ex-
amine its contents to
verify your answers to the
installation procedure in
reconfig.
netlog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Network server log file.
View it using tail or more.
prslog OC /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles Print server log file. View it
using tail or more.
userprefs.cfg OC /usr/g/config Contains hardware config-
uration information sup-
plied by you during the
software LFC and by the
system during initial poll-
ing of devices in the sys-
tem. View it using more.
Use grep to search for
specific parameters. grep
scanDiskDevice Scan-
Hardware.cfg
SvTubeUsage.log OC /usr/g/service/log Contains technique and
scan types used on sys-
tem since last software
LFC. Use scanReport to
view it.
SdCRHosts OC /usr/g/ctuser/Prefs This file contains all of of
the hosts adopted at ap-
plications. Use it to find
the IP addresses of other
hosts you can telnet to,
like AWWs.
SYSLOG OC /var/adm This is where IRIX hard-
ware and operating sys-
tem software errors are
reported. Here you will
find the reasons for CPU
malfunctions, SCSI errors,
and indications of system
start ups. Use more or
tail to view this text file.

4–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

4-4 SCRIPTS AND EXECUTABLES

Table 4–4 Scripts and Executables

Script/Executable Host Path Purpose


cleanMon OC No Path Shut applications and IRIX
login: ctuser down. See shutdown
procedure for apps only.
endsession OC No Path Logout of current desktop
and return to the login
window.
exitScript OC No Path Checks the status of ap-
login: ctuser plications and executes
endsession if apps are
down.
gattention message OC No Path Put a gatttention box on
the monitor containing the
text in message.
halt OC No Path Shut operating system
login: root software down.
hinv OC No Path Display hardware configu-
ration information. For
more information, use the
hard_Conf command.
mkfsMOD OC No Path Create a new file system
login: root on the MaxOptics disk
side currently installed in
the drive. This will clear
out everything on the disk.
mountMOD OC No Path Make the MaxOptics a
virtual partition on the disk
drive. Normal file functions
to the /MOD directory (like
cp, cd, ls, etc) will now
function on the optical
drive.
reconfig OC No Path Change site info, regen
login: root databases, etc.
SnapState OC No Path Store all logs to the MOD
for later review. Run to as-
sist with resolution of soft-
ware issues.
showdasm OC No Path This will query the DASM
Path: ctuser and provide you with con-
figuration information for
it.

4–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 4–4 Scripts and Executables (continued)

Script/Executable Host Path Purpose


showprods | grep NP OC No Path List the revision of the
system software.
startMon OC No Path Start applications pro-
login: ctuser cesses.
start_SMPTE OC No Path Installs the SMPTE pat-
login: ctuser tern in the browser.
unmountMOD OC No Path Release the MaxOptics
MOD’s virtual partition.
viewlog OC /usr/g/insite/bin Display
login: insite gesys_<suite>_OC0.log
with viewing controls.

4–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

4-5 VI EDITOR

Table 4–5 vi Editor

Command Effect
vi filename Enter vi editor and load filename for editing.
h Move cursor left one character. Cannot be in insert
character mode; <ESC> exits this mode and returns to
cursor control mode.
j Move cursor down one line. Cannot be in insert char-
acter mode; <ESC> exits this mode and returns to cur-
sor control mode.
k Move cursor up one line. Cannot be in insert character
mode; <ESC> exits this mode and returns to cursor
control mode.
l Move cursor right one character. Cannot be in insert
character mode; <ESC> exits this mode and returns to
cursor control mode.
i Insert characters where the cursor is. Hit <ESC> to
exit insert character mode.
a Insert characters after the current cursor position. Hit
<ESC> to exit insert character mode.
o Insert characters on the next line. Hit <ESC> to exit
insert character mode.
<ESC>:q! Quit without saving changes.
<ESC><Shift>ZZ Save changes and exit.
x Delete current character.
dd Delete current line.
<ESC>:w Save.
<ESC>:wq Save and exit.

4–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 5 2202119

SECTION 5 – SOFTWARE STRUCTURE

5-1 SOFTWARE STRUCTURE DIAGRAM

Illustration 5–1 Software Structure Diagram

UIF IOS

e/r event_router

ImageReceive
RTImageReceive
ScanReconMgr
RTScoutReceive
recon.req
Trend/Forecast
ReconCtrl
Cooling acq.req
DMA
AcqCtrl
scan.req
ReconJob
ScanCtrl
Recon Engine
RawMgr NPRM, NPRS

RawLoad
RawStore
tgp_in tgp_out
RawStoreSlave

ScbxHandler Command
Raw Disk
Status DBPCI Board

Keyboard Table/Gantry DAS Data


Scan Start / Stop /
Abort keys DAS

5–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 5 2202119

5-2 SOFTWARE MODULE DESCRIPTION

5-2-1 UIF: User Interface


D ScanRx → Scan operations: New Patient → Patient information input
View Edit → Scan change screen
GraphicRx → Localize planning

D ExamRxDisplay → Image Display


AutoView
AutoFilm

D RetroRecon → Retro Recon


View Edit, GraphicRetro

5-2-2 IOS: Imaging and Operating System


This system registers image data from ImageReceive, RTImageReceive, or RTScoutReceive, to Informix Database,
and displays them on Browser.

Application → Browser, Viewer, and all which are started on the Browser.
Server → imserver (vacant image space)
dbserver (image registration)
arserver (Archive: save/restore to/from MOD)
prserver (Filming)
netserver (Network)

5-2-3 ScanReconMgr: Scan Recon Manager


ScanReconMgr controls Cooling, Scan, Raw data, or Recon.

Functions
D Communicates with external subsystems such are UIF (User Interface), applications, etc., according to
predetermined protocols.

D Converts parameter blocks made and sent from UIF, applications, etc. into the parameter blocks (Scan-
Par, ReconPar, ToolPar, or RAW Par) which are used by each subsystem controller.

D Communicates with each subsystem controller sequentially, using the parameters described above.

D Interfaces messages sent from the Scan/Recon subsystems to external subsystems

D Performs other functions.

5–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 5 2202119

5-2-4 ScanCtrl: Scan Control


ScanCtrl controls the keyboard and Table/Gantry, and performs scans, by sequentially controlling tgp_in, tgp_out,
Cooling, Scan Box, etc.

Functions
D Assigns scan parameters derived from ScanPar sent from ScanReconMgr to each slice (image).

D Communicates with tgp_out, Cooling, and Scan Box for each slice (image).

D Performs controls according to the operator scan key operations sent from the Scan Box.

D Sends scan requests sequentially, synchronizing them with the timings of Inter scan delay, Voice. etc.

D Sends Trend (HV On/Off) requests to Cooling, and sends Display update requests to UIF.

D Sends scan progress status (Scan Start, End, Pause, etc.) to ScanReconMgr.

D ScbxHandler
Controls the keyboard operations (except AN and Ten keys).

D tgp_in
Receives status data from Table/Gantry.

D tgp_out
Sends commands to Table/Gantry.

5-2-5 tgp_in, tgp_out


Sends or receives commands/status to/from the firmware of the scan subsystems (Table, Gantry, Tube, or Genera-
tor).

Functions
D Converts TgpPar into command packets for the TGP firmware.

D Communicates with the TGP via serial lines.

D Controls ISD.

D Converts status data sent from the TGP into messages, and sends them to ScanCtrl or stores them to
Error log file.

5–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 5 2202119

5-2-6 AcqCtrl: Acquisition Control

Functions
D Decodes RawPar.

D Executes Raw reserve requests.

D Makes Raw data headers from RawPar sent form ScanReconMgr, and executes write requests of raw
data files on the raw data disk.

D Writes Cal/Decon data to raw data files.

5-2-7 RawMgr: Raw Manager


RawMgr handles scan data, and controls RawCtrTable and address for raw data files.

Functions
D Saves/loads scan data to/from MOD.

D Writes status of Reserve/Protect/RawDataStore of raw data to RawCtrlTable.

D Writes Raw headers to raw data files.

D Requests RawStore to store raw data files.

D Requests RawLoad to load Cal/Decon data to Recon Engine.

D Handles Protect/Unprotect for raw data files.

D Extracts required information from each raw data file.

5-2-8 RawLoad: Raw Load

Functions
D Reads and loads raw data files from the raw data disk to the Recon Engine, according the Raw data load
requests form RawMgr.

5–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 5 2202119

5-2-9 RawStore/RawStoreSlave

Functions
D When it (RawStore) receives Raw data store requests, it sets the DAS Buffer to a state where it (DAS
Buffer) can accept raw data transfer.

D When it receives transfer requests from the DAS Buffer device driver, it reads raw data files from the DAS
Buffer and writes them to the raw data disk.

D Requests extra data transfer to the DAS Buffer for Scan End.

5-2-10 ReconCtrl: Recon Control

Functions
D Enters ReconPar sent from ScanReconMgr into Recon Queue.

D Controls the Recon Queue.

D Controls On/Off of Recon wait protect for raw data files.

D Controls Start, Cancel, etc. for ReconJob.

5-2-11 ReconJob: Recon Job

Functions
D Loads raw data files, Cal/Decon data, etc. to Recon Engine, according to the recon parameters from Re-
conCtrl.

D Controls Recon Start, Cancel, etc. for the Recon Engine.

5–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 5 2202119

5-2-12 ImageReceive, RTImageReceive, RTScoutReceive

Functions
D Reads image data from the Recon Engine.

D Converts Image headers.

D Requests image registration from the Image database control process.

D ImageReceive: Image Receive


Reads reconstructed images from the Recon Engine, adds headers to them, and stores them.

D RTImageReceive: Realtime Image Receive


Reads realtime–reconstructed (Smart Recon) images from the Recon Engine, adds headers to them, and
stores them.

D RTScoutReceive: Realtime Scout Receive


Reads reconstructed scout images from the Recon Engine, adds headers to them, and stores them.

5-2-13 ToolCtrl: Tool Control


This ToolCtrl is not a memory–resident program. The ScanReconMgr starts/ends this program, when the Service UIF
requests the start/end of ToolCtrl.

Functions
D Executes off–line applications (except recon) such as service tools, which require the operation of the Re-
con Engine.

D Loads data to the Recon Engine, saves the resulted data to the disk, etc.

5–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

SECTION 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING

6-1 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN OC, TGP, OGP, CIF AND JEDI


Communications between OC, TGP, OGP, CIF(DAS) and kV Control(JEDI) are tested during Wake–up communica-
tion sequence. You can diagnose the communication failure by utilize this functionality.

Illustration 6–1 Communication Block Digram

(2
(1 ) (3
) TGP ) kV Ctl
OC OGP
(MP) (JEDI)
(6
(4
) (5
(2 (2 )
) (3
) ) CIF
)
(4 (DAS)
TGP TGP
(GP) (TP) )

6-1-1 Theory of Wake–up Communication


(1) OC will start Wake–up communication by sending SysConfig CMD to TGP(MP). The purpose of this
is to make sure about communication between each processors and to make each processors know
the current system configuration. The starting timing is one of followings:

– Just after OC is booted–up

– Just after receiving SysConfig Request from TGP(MP). TGP(MP) keeps sending SysConfig
Request to OC after booted–up until it receives SysConfig CMD from OC.

– When OC found the contents of SysConfig is changed.

If OC sends SysConfig CMD to TGP(MP) 3 times without successful, OC gives up communication


and output error message on gesyslog as below.

Failed to get response of system config.


Code is 3

Even under this sitation, OC looks booted–up correctly except error above. But the time moving from
New Patient Screen to Scan Edit Screen becomes extremely slowed down, which takes around 1
minutes. Also, Confirm button is never activated.

6–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-1 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN OC, TGP, OGP, CIF AND JEDI (continued)
(2) After TGP(MP) receives SysConfig CMD, it sends SysConfig CMD to TGP(GP), TGP(TP) and OGP
and wait for the response from each processor. TGP(TP) and TGP(GP) reply for TGP(MP) by send-
ing TG Status.

(3) After OGP receives SysConfig CMD, it sends SysConfig CMD to kV Control(JEDI) and CIF(DAS)..
OGP will wait for their reply.

(4) KV Control(JEDI) and CIF will reply for OGP by sending TG Status. TG Status will include error infor-
mation if there are. In case OGP cannot receive reply from kV Control or CIF in time, OGP put error
information on the TG Status which will be send to TGP(MP).

(5) OGP will send TG Status to TGP(MP) after it receives TG Staus both from kV Control and CIF or after
timeout is detected to receive reply.

(6) TGP(MP) will send TG Status to OC after it receives TG Status from all of TGP(TP), TGP(GP) and
OGP or after timeout is detected to receive reply.

6-1-2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting


Following is the error messages on gesyslog related to Wake–up communication. You can diagnose the commu-
nication failure from followings:

Table 6–1 Troubleshooting

Code Error Messages Explanation(Messages on V/R5.00 or lat- Failure


(Only on V/R5.00 or (V/R4.13 or before) er)
later)
N/A Failed to get response Failed to get response of system config. OC <–> TGP
of system config.
11–1010–03 SP is not wake up. TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP <–> OGP
OGP in response to SysConfig CMD.
11–1013–03 GP is not wake up. TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP inside
TGP(GP) in response to SysConfig CMD.
11–1012–03 TP is not wakeup. TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP inside
TGP(TP) in response to SysConfig CMD.
20–0014–02 JEDI Wakeup time out. OGP did not receive any reply from JEDI in OGP <–> kV Con-
response to SysConfig CMD nor JEDI Ca- trol
pability Request CMD.
20–0030–07 DAS Wakeup Time OGP did not receive any reply from CIF in OGP <–> CIF
Out. response to SysConfig.
30–0101–01 N/A Only for NX/i CIF received unspecified Qcal Ratio Data OGP <–> CIF
from OC on SysConfig.
30–0101–02 N/A Only for NX/i CIF could not receive all Qcal Ratio Data OGP <–> CIF
from OC on SysConfig.
20–1030–04 Mismatch DIPSW3 on OGP is mismatched with Sys- DIPSW3 setting of
DIPSW(SW3) and sys- Config CMD which was sent from TGP. OGP
tem config.
20–1030–06 System Config Error OGP received unspecified SysConfig from Unmatched be-
TGP. tween OGP and OC
software

6–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH


Data from Detector is sampled synchronized with DAS TRIG signal. So DAS Data Path Trouble Shooting can
be separated into DAS TRIG signal trouble shooting and DAS Data troube shooting. DAS TRIG signal is one
of pre–requisite for DAS Data transfer.
Refer to Illustration 6–2.

6-2-1 Pre–requisite
Communication path from OC to CIF, through TGP, Slip Ring and OGP, should be confirmed to work before this
trouble shooting. You can check the result of Wake–up communication for brief confirmation.

6–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH (continued)

6-2-2 DAS TRIG Signal Troubleshooting


There are 3 sources of DAS TRIG signal. 1st one is Azimuth encoder, 2nd is Cradle encoder, 3rd is OGP itself
and last one is TGP. Each sources are selected by OGP and TGP depend on the Scan Type except TGP as
below :
Azimuth Encoder : selected on Axial Scan, Helical and Cine Scan
Cradle Encoder : selected on Scout Scan
OGP ; selected on Stationary Scan
TGP : selected in case reset switch is pushed on TGP.
As described above, DAS TRIG signal line is used to send RESET from TGP to OGP.

If you encounter the trouble related to DAS TRIG signal, it is recommended to try various scan type and resetting
OGP through TGP to identify which path is in failure as followings:

(1) At first, proceed Stationary Scan using Off Line Scan. To make it simplify, data pattern can be set
as DAS pattern, Rotor and X–ray Off and Current Azimuth is suggested. In case you found the failure,
most probable failure is CIF and cabling between CIF and OGP.

(2) Secondly, proceed Scout Scan using Off Line Scan. DAS pattern and Rotor Off is suggested. In case
it does not work, try (4) to check signal line between TGP and OGP. If it does work, most probable
failure is on Cradle Encoder and cabling between this and TGP. On TBLCON BD, there are not any
components for DAS TRIG, but just connect from CN9 to CN1. On TBL BD, there are one component
to change the signal type.

(3) Next, proceed Axial Scan using Off Line Scan. DAS pattern and Rotor Off is suggested. In case it
does not work, try (4) to check signal line between TGP and OGP. If it does work, most probable fail-
ure is on Servo Amp and cabling between Azimuth Encoder and TGP. On SUB BD there are not any
components for DAS TRIG, but just connect from CN5 to CN2.

(4) If you found problem in (2) or (3), try to reset OGP by pushing RESET switch on TGP and check OGP
is corrected reset. After reset correctly, OGP shoud go to IDLE status, which is DS6 on OGP blinks.
If OGP is not reset, DAS TRIG signal line between TGP and OGP has the problem. Between them,
there are cable between TGP and Signal Brush board, Slip Ring, Signal CONN board and cable be-
tween Signal CONN and OGP. In this case, it is suggested to change Signal CONN board tentatively
at first because there is another one on backside of Slip Ring, which is exactly the same and not used.

6–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH (continued)

Illustration 6–2 DAS Data and DAS TRIG Signal Flow

LBB Gantry Rotating


CAM

DDP

DDP

CIF
DAS Data

OC
401 CN1 J2 J2
RF RF J3
402 CN3 DTRF DASIFN J9 J3 DBPCI
XMT RCV Optic fiber

Optic fiber

Axial/Helical/Cine Scan
403

CN2 CN5 CN1 CN2


SUB BD Servo Amp
OGP TGP CN10
SIG Azimuth Encoder
CN8 CN6 SIG CN7
BRSH
CON
BD
CN11 CN1 CN2 CN1 CN9
Stationary Scan TBL BD TBLCON
(DAS TRIG is generated by
OGP) Cradle Encoder
Gantry Stationary Scout Scan Table

DAS TRIG Signal

Applicable only to Twin Systems

6–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

6–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH (continued)

6-2-3 DAS Data Troubleshooting


For DAS Data trouble shooting, LED indication of each components are beneficial. it is recommended that to
confirm data path on rotating side using stationary scan at first. Proceed rotation scan as next step to confirm
data path on Slip Ring. Following is the LED status to help you identify whether DAS Data is coming or not. These
status is based on Off Line Scan with Rotor Off, DAS Data as Normal mode.

LED of RF RCV is not based on DAS Data but based on carrier wave. So RF Output LED does not change even
in the case DAS Data is not available. But when carrier wave is sent correctly, DAS Data can be sent correctly
in most of the case through Slip Ring because of error correction mechanism between DTRF and DASIFN.

Refer to LED Description Section on Diagnostic TAB for detail of each LEDs

DTRF Assy
DAS data does not
IDLE Scan
come
+5V Lit Lit Lit
CONERR
Lit in short duration
DSON Lit
at first
Lit in short duration
DSIN Lit
at first
FECERR
CSTRB
ACK Lit
Lit when cable from
DXFER Lit
DAS is disconneted.

RF XMIT(Only for ETC Slip Ring)


DAS data does not
IDLE Scan
come
RED when optic
LED GREEN GREEN cable from DTRF is
disconnected

RF RCV(Only for ETC Slip Ring)


DAS data does not
IDLE Scan
come
GREEN GREEN GREEN
Power LED (RED if RF Shoe is (RED if RF Shoe is (RED if RF Shoe is
not connected) not connected) not connected)
Lit if aligned in Lit if aligned in Lit if aligned in
AGC Center
center center center
Change depend on Change depend on Change depend on
RF Output
RF output power RF output power RF output power

6–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH (continued)


DASIFN
DAS data does not
IDLE Scan
come
+5V Lit Lit
VLTN Lit
FECERR
VSIZE
DSRST
DSCLR
Lit during scan
DSREQ (slightly lit if scan
time is slow)
DSACK
DSERR
Lit during scan
VIEW (slightly lit if scan
time is slow)
ENDNG
FIFO1FF
OFF during Scan
FIFO2FF Lit (Lit when preparing Lit
Scan)
FPGACONFIG

DBPCI
DAS data does not
IDLE Scan
come
T_OVER
E_OVER
TREQ
ERR
LINT
RESET
DSACK
FIFO slightly lit
DBMEN Lit
DSREQ slightly lit
PCIREQ Blink
SLAVE

6–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH (continued)

6-2-4 Data Path Troubleshooting under Intermittent Failure


In case DAS data itself is coming to OC with errors below, this means intermittent failure occurs during transferring
raw data.

(1) ‘Corrected View Number of BADRAW’ which means bad views were found but it was successfully cor-
rected during reconstruction process.

(2) ‘Uncorrected View Number of BADRAW’ which means bad views were found and it cannot be correct.
Image was not displayed as the result.

To identify the failure under this situation, data encoding/decoding theory is useful. Next page shows the summery
of data format and what kind of information is appeared on LED or View End Mark. Please refer to DASIFN Section
on Advanced Theory Of Operation for detail.

In case you can find the bit errors constantly on specific position like below, failure should be on parallel data line.
Example below indicates 3rd bit in one set of 16 bits is always zero

0000 1111 0222 3333 4444 5555 4666 7777 8888 9999 8aaa

Parallel data line failure occurs on CIF, DTRF, DASIFN, DBPCI, cabling between CIF and DTRF or between DASIFN
and DBPCI. It may happen most possibly on DBPCI because there are most complex circuit to handle parallel signal.

6–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

6–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-2 DAS DATA PATH (continued)

Illustration 6–3 Data Path Troubleshooting under Intermittent Failure

Bypassing Slip Ring

Parallel Data from DAS Parallel Data to DBPCI


RF RF
DTRF DASIFN
Optic fiber XMT RCV Optic fiber

Parallel Data Encoded Serial Data Parallel Data


Encoded Check Encoded Check
DAS data/view VEM VEM DAS data/view VEM
Data Bytes Data Bytes

Encoded DAS Data/view


VEM : View End Mark

Errors encountered when encoding on DTRF Errors encountered when decoding on DASIFN
FEC Encoding Error FEC Encoding Error
Indicated on FECERR LED of DTRF (This means DASIFN received ENDNG from DTRF)
Status is cleared when hardware reset Indicated on ENDNG LED of DASIFN
Possible failure is on upper stream than DTRF Status is cleared when next scan start
Possible failure is on upper stream than DTRF
FEC Correction Error
(This means DASIFN cannot correct errors and this view cannot be used.)
To identify which one is failed in Slip Ring and
Indicated on FECERR LED of DASIFN and VEM
DTRF/DASIFN, you can bypass Slip Ring by Status is cleared when next scan start for LED
following procedure. VEM can be displayed using GSA.
Possible failure is between DTRF and DASIFN.
1. Disconnect the optic fiber from DTRF. Most possibly failed on RF RCV including adjustment.
2. Connect optic fiber which is from DASIFN View Size Error
Indicated on VSIZE LED of DASIFN and VEM
directly with DTRF as showed above in dotted
Status is cleared when next scan start for LED
line. VEM can be displayed using GSA.
Possible failure is between DTRF and DASIFN.
Be sure that Rotation Switch on lower backside Most possibly failed on RF RCV including adjustment
of gantry is off and use stationary scan with Fatal Error
current azimuth for testing. Indicated on DSERR LED of DASIFN and VEM
Status is cleared when next scan start for LED

6–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

6–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-3 IMAGE DATABASE TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS


The followings are useful to resolve the image database failure.

6-3-1 Image–Database–Oriented Problems

Problems Possible Cause Solution


The image cannot be deleted. D There is queues of the image to be D Delete queues.
deleted.
D Remove the image to be de-
D The image to be selected is dis- leted from the Display or Brows-
played on the Display or Browser er desktop.
desktop.
D Reboot the system and retry.
The image cannot be selected on This is not database failure. Restart the Browser and retry.
the Browser.
The image is deleted, but recovered. The system may be shut down be- Restart the system and retry.
fore completing the image deletion.
The reconstructed image cannot be D Reconstruction failure might oc- Retry to display the image on the
displayed. cur. Display or Browser desktop.

D The image display has been


skipped.
The archived queue cannot be de- The MOD drive failure might occur. There is a queue in /usr/g/ex-
leted. (This is not database failure.) tra_tmp directory. Write down the
names of the file of which size is
not zero, and delete them.
Create the new files with the
same name you wrote down, us-
ing “touch” command.
Then modify the file properties of
owner, group, and permission as
needed.
Lastly, reboot the system.
After executing Edit Patient, old pa- There is a possibility of database D Restart the Browser and retry.
tient data remains on the list. They failure, but other failures might oc-
can not be deleted. cur. D Ask your OLC to analyze all files
under the /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles/
directory.

D Perform the LFW (Load–From–


Warm).

6–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-3-2 Log Files for Image Database

Directory and Name Descriptions Usage


/usr/ctuser/logfiles/dbwlog Write log to database If any error occurred, database
trouble is doubtful.
/usr/g/ctuser/logfiles/dbrlog Read log to database If any error occurred, database
trouble is doubtful.
/usr/g/ctuser/logfiles/imslog Access log for IM Server History of Image deletion.
i.e. “removed series xxxx/xx”
/usr/g/informix/databases/online.log Online log of database If error occurred just after boot
up, there is a possibility of data-
base destruction. The LFW
should be performed to resolve
this error.
Example Displayed:
07:32:13 Error building ’sysmas-
ter’ database.
It is difficult to troubleshoot the er-
ror using this log only. Check if
the errors might occur in other
logs such as SYSLOG. If the
hardware failure (HDD...) may
cause the error, panic or other er-
ror occurs at the same time.

6–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

6-4 DICOM FILMING OR NETWORK TRANSFER IS SLOW (NETWORK TIPS)


There are many cases of DICOM Camera slow filming and this section discusses one of the root cause and counter-
measure. This method is sometimes useful for other network troubleshooting. This occurs O2 don’t always Auto–Ne-
gotiation correctly with some Network Switches, causing high data error rates and retries. As an example, it is re-
ported that Nortel Switch Hub has this type of trouble.

As a solution for this type of trouble, the cancel the Auto–Negotiation function and set the Ethernet mode manually.
The following procedure is to set the manual Ethernet mode setting.

Note
Consult to site’s network engineer what type of Ethernet link speed and duplex mode is recom-
mended before proceed.

1. Power on the system and press “Stop for maintenance” button to enter maintenance menu.
(or if the system is already started, execute Application Shutdown and press “ESC” key twice when “OK” mes-
sage is displayed)

2. Click on Command.

3. Type the following command

> setenv ec0mode xxxx

xxxx is the mode parameter for link speed and duplex mode as shown:

– 100f –> 100Base–T/Full Duplex

– 100h –> 100Base–T/Half Duplex

– 10f –> 10Base–T/Full Duplex

– 10h –> 10Base–T/Half Duplex

4. Close the command screen and restart the system.

6–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

6–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

SECTION 7 – RING VALUE MEASUREMENT

CT HiSpeed Series has the program which calculates named “Ring Value”. It takes from 0 to positive number (0 is
best). It will become the reference number for measurement of Image quality.
This section discusses the procedure how to measure the Ring Value.

For example of usage, if customer has a problem of patient image quality, check the Active Mean DAS count using
GSA, then according to the DAS Count, select the scan technique and measure the Ring Value.

1. Perform the phantom scanning with the following Scan Technique Table. Memorize the Exam number.

Common Configuration:
Large (42cm.) Phantom set to Scan center. 2i mode scan.
Recon FOV is 50cm.

Active Mean DAS KV TH mA Scan Time Measured Value Reference Value


Count (It is not Spec.)
0 ∼ 500 120 3 100 1 < 3.988
500 ∼ 1000 120 3 130 1.5 < 3.543
1000 ∼ 1500 120 5 130 2 < 1.497
1500 ∼ 2000 120 5 150 2 < 0.762
2000 ∼ 120 5 200 2 < 0.504

2. Go to Service Desktop and open shell.

3. Type “phantomAnalysis” on the shell prompt, then program runs.

4. Press “Select Image” button to select the scanned image. See Illustration (next page).

5. Enter the phantom size as 42cm. See Illustration (next page).

6. Then press RV button. See Illustration (next page).

7. Scroll the right area, then Averaged Total Ring Value is found. See Illustration (next Page).

8. To close the phantomAnalysis screen, press “EXIT” button. See Illustration (next page).

7–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Illustration 7–1 Phantom Analysis Screen

Step 7: Step 7:
Scroll here. Record this number as Ring Value.

Step 6: Step 5:
Press this button. Enter “42” here.

Step 4: Step 8:
Press this button. Press this button.

7–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

OPERATOR CONSOLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 BOARDS ON NEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 BOARDS ON CONNECTOR BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-3-1 DASM–VDB (2191523) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-3-2 DASM–LCAM (2191524) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-3-3 DASM II–VDB (2191523–3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-3-4 DASM II–LCAM (2191524–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
1-4 OTHER BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33

SECTION 2 – TEST PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 SYSTEM POWER–UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-3 OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3-2 Running Off–Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3-3 Viewing the Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-3-4 Editing Off–line Test Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-3-5 Off–line Test Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-4 HARDWARE TO BE USED IN HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-4-1 Interactive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-4-2 Off–line NPR Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2-4-3 Off–line DBPCI Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18

SECTION 3 – HOST PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-3 RECOVERING FROM SYSTEM CRASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-4 DISABLING THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-5 INTEGRATED DIAGNOSTIC ENVIRONMENT (IDE) TESTS ON THE O2 . . . . . . . . 3–9

SECTION 4 – NPR (RECON ENGINE) TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4-4 AUTO POST RECON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17

i OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

SECTION 1 – LED DESCRIPTION

1-1 BOARDS ON NEST

Table 1–1 NPRIF LED Description

LED Description
DS1 (PCORQ) Lights while the NPRIF board issues a request to the NPRM
board to access the CM (Communication Memory).
DS2 (PCOAK) Lights while NPRM returns Acknowledge of the request (de-
scribed above) to NPRIF.
(Both DS1 and DS2 LEDs light while NPRIF accesses the CM)
DS3 (PGM0RQ) Lights while NPRIF issues a request to NPRM to access the
GM (Global Memory).
DS4 (PGM0AK) Lights while NPRM returns Acknowledge of the request (de-
scribed above) to NPRIF.
(Both DS3 and DS4 LEDs light while NPRIF accesses the GM)
DS5 (PZ00RQ) Lights while NPRIF issues a request to NPRM to access the
IM (DSP Internal Memory).
DS6 (PZ00AK) Lights while NPRM returns Acknowledge of the request (de-
scribed above) to NPRIF.
(Both DS5 and DS6 LEDs light while NPRIF accesses the IM)
DS7 (IMT2Z) Lights while NPRIF issues an interrupt to NPRM.
DS8 (OINTRQ) Lights while NPRM issues an interrupt to the host processor.
DS9 (BSERR) Lights when non–existent or non–defined addresses are ac-
cessed.
DS10 (LSERR) Lights when LSERR# output from the PCI interface chip is ac-
tive. At this time, Target Abort or Master Abort is occurring on
the PCI bus.
DS11 (NPRRST) Lights when NPRIF and NPRM/NPRS board(s) which are con-
nected to NPRIF are reset.
DS12 (VCC) Lights while DC power is supplied.

1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-1 BOARDS ON NEST (continued)

Table 1–2 DBPCI LED Description

LED Description
PCIREQ Lights when the local bus access is requested by Slave or
DMA during PCI access.
Slave Lights during PCI Slave access.
DBMEN Lights when the DBM (DAS Buffer Memory) is enabled to take
in DAS data.
DSREQ Lights when the DASIFN board requests data transfer.
DSACK Lights when notifying DASIFN that data has been transferred
to the DBPCI board.
FIFO Lights when the FIFO stores data whose quantity is half its
capacity.
LINT Lights when an INTA interrupt is issued to the PCI9060.
Reset Lights while DBPCI is reset.
TREQ Lights upon TREQ (Transfer Request).
E_OVR Lights upon DAS Error Overflow. Goes off upon Reset.
PWR Lights while +5 V power is supplied.

1–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-1 BOARDS ON NEST (continued)

Table 1–3 NPRM LED Description

LED Description
LED7–0 See Illustration 1–1.
MS00 Lights when the master DSP is requesting access of GM. (Master DSP MS00 signal)
MS10 Lights when the master DSP is requesting access of PM. (Master DSP MS10 signal)
MS30 Lights when the master DSP is requesting access of i860cont, INTREQ REG, CM, or
Comm. REG. (Master DSP MS30 signal)
ACK1 Goes off during a wait cycle by the hardware. (Master DSP ACK signal)
POWER Lights while 5 V power is supplied.
PZ0AK Lights when the host processor (PCI) is accessing the master DSP.
PGMAK Lights when the host processor (PCI) is accessing GM.
PCMAK Lights when the host processor (PCI) is accessing CM.
CMR Lights when the master DSP is accessing CM.
ZXLM Lights when the master DSP is requesting access of the slave DSP PM.
ZXIM Lights when the master DSP is requesting access of the slave DSP IM.
Z0LBG Lights when the master DSP is using the GM bus.
Z1LBG Lights when DSP#1 is using the GM bus.
Z2LBG Lights when DSP#2 is using the GM bus.
Z3LBG Lights when DSP#3 is using the GM bus.
Z4LBG Lights when DSP#4 is using the GM bus.
Z5LBG Lights when DSP#5 is using the GM bus.
Z6LBG Lights when DSP#6 is using the GM bus.
Z7LBG Lights when DSP#7 is using the GM bus.
Z8LBG Lights when DSP#8 is using the GM bus.
Z9LBG Lights when DSP#9 is using the GM bus.
Z10LBG Lights when DSP#10 is using the GM bus.
Z11LBG Lights when DSP#11 is using the GM bus.
Z12LBG Lights when DSP#12 is using the GM bus.
Z13LBG Lights when DSP#13 is using the GM bus.
Z14LBG Lights when DSP#14 is using the GM bus.
Z15LBG Lights when DSP#15 is using the GM bus.
Z16LBG Lights when DSP#16 is using the GM bus.

1–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Illustration 1–1 NPRM LED

DSP Status LED7–0

Boot Up Phase
1: Complete Boot Up DMA
2: Initialize DSP’ Register
3: Initialize Communication Memory
4: Initialize Internal Memory OFF

ÉÉ
5: Set Config Status Block ON

É
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
6: Initialize Communication Register
É ÉÉ ON or OFF
7: Complete Boot Up Slave DSP
8: Initialize Link Port Register
É ÉÉ
É
9: Complete Boot Up

Program Running / Idle Phase


Idling Status ÉÉÉÉ
É ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ É
ÉÉÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
É É
(Blinking)

ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
Program Running Status
Slave DSP’s Interrupt
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
PCI’s Interrupt
ÉÉ
É ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉ
É
É ÉÉ
É
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
External DMA Running

ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
Link Port DMA Running
LP5
LP4
LP2
LP0
Error
Bus Error
Abort by PCI
ÉÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉ

1–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-1 BOARDS ON NEST (continued)

Table 1–4 NPRS LED Description

LED Description
F3–0 See Illustration 1–2.
MS0 Lights when the slave DSP is requesting access of GM. (Slave DSP MS00 signal)
MS1 Lights when the slave DSP is requesting access of PM. (Slave DSP MS10 signal)
ACK Goes off during a wait cycle by the hardware. (Slave DSP ACK signal)
HBG0 Lights when the slave DSP is not using the bus because the master DSP requests
access of the slave DSP.

Illustration 1–2 NPRS LED

DSP Status LED (F3–0)

Boot Up Phase
1: Complete Boot Up DMA
2: Initialize DSP’ Register
3: Initialize Private Memory
4: Initialize Internal Memory OFF
5: Initialize Link Port Register

ÉÉ
ON

ÉÉ
6: Complete Boot Up ON or OFF

ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
Program Running / Idle Phase
Idling Status
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ (Blinking)
Program Running Status
External DMA Running
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ ÉÉ
ÉÉ
É
Link Port DMA Running

ÉÉ
É LP2
LP0
Error

Bus Error
Abort by Master DSP

1–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-1 BOARDS ON NEST (continued)

Table 1–5 PCI Backplane LED Description

LED Description
POWER ON Lights while power is supplied.

Illustration 1–3 PCI Backplane

PS3

POWER ON LED
(P11) (P12)
(P9)
(P8)

1–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-2 BOARDS ON CONNECTOR BOX

Table 1–6 DASIFN or DASIFN2 LED Description

LED Description
+5V Lights while +5 V Power is supplied.
VLTN Lights while Taxi Violation occurs.
FECERR Lights when a FEC Correction error occurs.
VSIZE Lights when a View Size Correction occurs.
DSRST Lights when _DSRST is active.
DSCLR Lights when _DSCLR is active.
DSREQ Lights when _DSREQ is active.
DSACK Lights when _DSACK is active.
DSERR Lights when _DSERR is active.
VIEW Lights every transfer view.
ENDNG Lights when receiving View END NG CMD.
FIFO1FF Lights when FIFO1 is full.
FIFO2FF Lights when FIFO2 is full.
FPGACONFIG Lights during configurating the FPGA.

1–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX

1-3-1 DASM–VDB (2191523)

Table 1–7 DASM–VDB LED Description

LED Description
Image Ready Indicates that an image has been processed, and is stable at the VDB video
output.
Image Transfer Indicates that an image in the DASM is being processed and transferred to the
VDB frame buffer. Note that the video image is not available at the output port
during this internal transfer.
Power This light indicates that the DASM–VDB is powered up. If this light does not
illuminate at power–up, you should first check the power cable connections.
CPU This light indicates that the DASM CPU is active and operating properly. It
flashes continuously (blinks on an off) following power–up.
SCSI This light indicates activity on the SCSI bus, such as commands sent or data
received.
Personality Mod- This light indicates activity in the DASM–VDB personality module, such as data
ule Interface received.

Illustration 1–4 DASM–VDB

Image Transfer Image Ready

VDB
Module
VIDEO PIXEL CLOCK CAMERA CONTROL

DASM
Module

Power CPU SCSI Personality


(1) (2) Module (4)
Interface

1–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX (continued)

Powering On
The following sequence occurs in the LED’s when the power switch is turned on:

1. The Power LED comes on.

2. The octal SCSI ID flashes briefly. The Least Significant Bit is next to the Power LED. Note that if the SCSI ID
is zero, no LEDs flash.

3. The three LEDs which represent an octal value flash once and go out.

4. Once the power–up sequence completes, the DASM CPU LED (second light from left) blinks regularly, indicating
that the CPU is active and functioning normally.

Start Up Sequence
When the DASM–VDB interface module is powering up, it performs start–up diagnostics and other related actions.

At power–up, the DASM unit performs the following tests:

D EPROM checksum test

D MFP 68901 access test (the Multi Function Peripheral chip controls the serial port, timing, and I/O)

D SCSI register access test

D Static RAM test

D Dynamic RAM test

D DMA test

When the DASM CPU LED blinks continuously at about two flashes per second, the initialization sequence is com-
plete, and the continuous self–test is in progress. The self–test runs until a SCSI command (a write to block 0 on the
DASM) is sent by the host. This test signals an error condition by blinking the CPU, SCSI, and Personal Module Inter-
face LEDs in tandem, continuously.

1–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX (continued)

Start Up Problems
To report diagnostic conditions, the LEDs on the DASM–VDB front panel have a corresponding binary presentation.
The illustration 1–4 shows the value assigned to each LED (CPU, SCSI, Personal Module Interface LEDs).

DASM LED Error Codes


Using LEDs 1, 2, and 4 (CPU, SCSI, Personal Module Interface LEDs), a binary code signals any of the conditions
listed in Table 1–8. The Power LED is not used to report diagnostic conditions.
The three LEDs permit a combined total of only seven error codes. To overcome this limitation, the codes are defined
as a series of one or more patterns. Each pattern begins with all LEDs flashing briefly, to indicate the start of the num-
ber sequence that follows.
For example, to display error code 12 (Failed SCSI Interface Test), the CPU LED displays the first digit (1), stopping
briefly before the SCSI LED displays the second digit (2), as shown in Illustration 1–5.
The display of each digit lasts approximately four times the duration of the initial binary “7” (that if, the flash of all LEDs).
The patter then repeats. Only the significant digits for each error condition are listed in Table 1–8.

Note:
The first error stops the start–up sequence immediately.

Illustration 1–5 LED Error Code Sequence

+ + = 12

All Flash “1” “2”


Short Long Long

1–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX (continued)

Table 1–8 DASM Start–up Error Conditions

Value Significance
1 Failed To Set Timer
2 Failed To Set Baud Rate
3 Failed To Access Receiver Status Reg. For Serial I/O
4 Failed To Start Refresh Clock
5 Failed In Set Up Of Serial I/O
6 Checksum Failed
7 Failed Static RAM Test
11 Failed I/O RAM Test
12 Failed SCSI Interface Test
13 Failed To Start VRTXE Operating System
21 Bus Error
22 Address Error
23 Illegal Instruction
24 Undefined MFP (MC68901) Interrupt
25 Zero–divide – Through Trace Trap Level 5
26 Chk, Trapv, Privilege, Or Trace Interrupt
31 Unknown Interrupt

1–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX (continued)

1-3-2 DASM–LCAM (2191524)

Table 1–9 DASM–LCAM LED Description

LED Description
Power This light indicates that the DASM–LCAM is powered up. If this light does not
illuminate at power–up, you should first check the power cable connections.
CPU This light indicates that the DASM CPU is active and operating properly. It
flashes continuously (blinks on an off) following power–up.
SCSI This light indicates activity on the SCSI bus, such as commands sent or data
received.
Personality Mod- This light indicates activity in the DASM–LCAM personality module, such as
ule Interface data received.

Illustration 1–6 DASM–LCAM

Power CPU SCSI Personality


(1) (2) Module (4)
Interface

1–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX (continued)

Powering On
The following sequence occurs in the LED’s when the power switch is turned on:

1. The Power LED comes on.

2. The octal SCSI ID flashes briefly. The Least Significant Bit is next to the Power LED. Note that if the SCSI ID
is zero, no LEDs flash.

3. The three LEDs which represent an octal value flash once and go out.

4. Once the power–up sequence completes, the DASM CPU LED (second light from left) blinks regularly, indicating
that the CPU is active and functioning normally.

Start Up Sequence

Start Up Sequence
When the DASM–LCAM interface module is powering up, it performs start–up diagnostics and other related actions.

At power–up, the DASM unit performs the following tests:

D EPROM checksum test

D MFP 68901 access test (the Multi Function Peripheral chip controls the serial port, timing, and I/O)

D SCSI register access test

D Static RAM test

D Dynamic RAM test

D DMA test

When the DASM CPU LED blinks continuously at about two flashes per second, the initialization sequence is com-
plete, and the continuous self–test is in progress. The self–test runs until a SCSI command (a write to block 0 on the
DASM) is sent by the host. This test signals an error condition by blinking the CPU, SCSI, and Personal Module Inter-
face LEDs in tandem, continuously.

1–13 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3 UNITS ON PERIPHERAL BOX (continued)

Start Up Problems
To report diagnostic conditions, the LEDs on the DASM–LCAM front panel have a corresponding binary presentation.
The illustration 1–6 shows the value assigned to each LED (CPU, SCSI, Personal Module Interface LEDs).

DASM LED Error Codes


Using LEDs 1, 2, and 4 (CPU, SCSI, Personal Module Interface LEDs), a binary code signals any of the conditions
listed in Table 1–8. The Power LED is not used to report diagnostic conditions.
The three LEDs permit a combined total of only seven error codes. To overcome this limitation, the codes are defined
as a series of one or more patterns. Each pattern begins with all LEDs flashing briefly, to indicate the start of the num-
ber sequence that follows.
For example, to display error code 12 (Failed SCSI Interface Test), the CPU LED displays the first digit (1), stopping
briefly before the SCSI LED displays the second digit (2), as shown in Illustration 1–5.
The display of each digit lasts approximately four times the duration of the initial binary “7” (that if, the flash of all LEDs).
The patter then repeats. Only the significant digits for each error condition are listed in Table 1–8.

Note:
The first error stops the start–up sequence immediately.

1–14 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3 DASM II–VDB (2191523–3)

1-3-3-1 DASM II–VDB LED Indicators


The DASM II–VDB front panel has six LEDs, which are used for status and error information. These lights are illus-
trated below:

PIF
SCSI
XMIT CPU
RDY PWR

4 2 1

From left to right, the lights indicate the following:

D RDY
Image Ready light indicates that an image has been transferred, and is stable at the VDB video output.

D XMIT
Image Transmit light indicates that an image is being transferred from the Common Memory to the VDB
Field Memory. Note that a printable video image is not available during an image transfer.

D PIF
Personality Interface light activity, in the VDB application, coincides with the image transmit function.

D SCSI
This light indicates the host is accessing the DASM via the SCSI bus, such as commands sent or data
received.

D CPU
This light indicates that the DASM CPU is active and operating properly. It flashes continuously ( “blinks”
on and off) following power–up.

D PWR
Power Light indicates that the DASM is powered. If this light does not illuminate at power–up, you should
first check the power cord connections.

1–15 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-2 Start–up Sequence


When the DASM II–VDB is powering up, it performs start–up diagnostics and other related actions.

At power–up, the DASM Controller performs the following tests:

D EPROM checksum test

D MFP 68901 access test (the Multi Function Peripheral chip controls the serial port, timing, and I/O)

D SCSI register access test

D Static RAM test

D Dynamic RAM test

D DMA test

When the DASM CPU LED blinks continuously at about two flashes per second, the initialization sequence is com-
plete.

If an error occurs, the error condition is reported by blinking the CPU, SCSI, and PIF LEDs in tandem followed by an
error code.

Powering On
The following sequence occurs on the front panel’s LEDs when the power switch is turned on:

1. The Power LED lights.

2. The octal SCSI ID flashes briefly. The Least Significant Bit is next to the Power LED. Note that if the SCSI ID
is zero, no LEDs flash.

3. The three LEDs flash once and go out.

4. Once the power–up sequence completes, the DASM CPU LED (second light from right) blinks regularly, indicat-
ing that the CPU is active and functioning normally.

1–16 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-3 Self–Test Options


Once the start–up sequence is complete, the resident software reads the state of the DIP switch labeled SW1 on the
DASM II–VDB board to determine whether further tests are enabled. To access SW1 you must first remove the top
cover. Upon locating SW1 you will notice the numbers 0, 1, and 2 silk screened on the printed circuit board. The way
Self–Test executes is determined by the setting shown below:

Switch Position Continuous Serial Loop– Single Pass Single Pass w/ Debug Mode
Mode back Memory
0 Closed Closed Open Open Open
1 Closed Open Closed Closed Open
2 Closed Closed Closed Open Open

D Continuous Mode:
Is the default setting. After executing the start–up diagnostic, the resident software will continuously run
the VDB self–test. Self–test will continue until the first SCSI command is received by the DASM.

D Serial Loop Test:


In this mode the VDB tests the RS422 Driver and Receiver. Prior to executing this, a special loop–back
connector on the front panel of the VDB, without the loop–back connector the test will fail.

The loop–back connector is made by simply adding two wires to a 25–pin Male ‘D’ connector: (pin 8 to
pin 9) and (pin 21 to pin 22).

D Single Pass:
The start–up diagnostics execute once, as described in 1-3-3-2 Start–up Sequence. Please be aware
that when position 0 is open error and other messages encountered during start–up diagnostics are di-
rected to the serial port. Otherwise the errors are encoded on the LEDs.

D Single Pass w/Memory:


Is controlled by Bit 2. When open the DASM exercises the entire DRAM during the start–up diagnostics.
The Single Pass w/Memory test can take several minutes to complete, this is why it is normally disabled.

D Debug Mode:
When position 1 is open the program jumps to the I/O Monitor when a diagnostic error occurs. The I/O
Monitor gives the basic tools to debug the hardware. Opening positions 0 and 2 allows the technician
access to the start–up diagnostic suite via the serial port.

1–17 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-4 Start–up Problem


To report diagnostic conditions, the LEDs on the DASM II–VDB front panel have a corresponding binary representa-
tion. The illustration 1–7 below shows the value assigned to each LED. The section after the figure explains how the
LEDs represent error codes. Note that this sections deals with error codes related to the DASM Controller, where
Section 1-3-3-5, VDB Error Codes, explains the method used to report an error from the VDB diagnostic.

DASM Controller LED Error Codes


Using LEDs 2 and 4, a binary code signals any of the conditions listed in Table 1–10. The Power light and PIF LEDs
are not used to report diagnostic conditions.

The three LEDs permit a combined total of only seven error codes. To overcome this limitation, the codes are defined
as a series of one or more patterns. Each pattern begins with all LEDs flashing briefly, to indicate the start of the num-
ber sequence that follows.

For example, to display error code 12 (Failed SCSI Interface Test), the CPU LED displays the first digit (1), stopping
briefly before the SCSI LED displays the second digit (2), as shown in Illustration 1–7.

Illustration 1–7 LED Error Code Sequence

+ + = 12

All Flash “1” “2”


Short Long Long

The display of each digit lasts approximately four times the duration of the initial binary “7” (that is, the flash of all
LEDs). The pattern then repeats. Only the significant digits for each error condition are listed in Table 1–8.

Note:
The first error stops the start–up sequence immediately.

1–18 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-4 Start–up Problem (Continued)

Table 1–10 DASM Controller Start–up Error Conditions

Value Significance
1 Failed To Set Timer
2 Failed To Set Baud Rate
3 Failed To Access Receiver Status Reg. For Serial I/O
4 Failed To Start Refresh Clock
5 Failed In Set Up Of Serial I/O
6 Checksum Failed
7 Failed Static RAM Test
11 Failed I/O RAM Test
12 Failed SCSI Interface Test
13 Failed To Start VRTXE Operating System
21 Bus Error
22 Address Error
23 Illegal Instruction
24 Undefined MFP (MC68901) Interrupt
25 Zero–divide – Through Trace Trap Level 5
26 Chk, Trapv, Privilege, Or Trace Interrupt
31 Unknown Interrupt

1–19 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-5 VDB Error Codes


The following sequence is used to signal an error during the VDB portion of the Self–test.

First, all three LEDs blink together for the duration of a single pass. This requires approximately 10–15 seconds.
Then the specific error code blinks twice before the next pass begins, with all three LEDs blinking together as before.

The bit pattern of the error codes appears as a series of LEDs being turned on and off. The low order bit is first.

When two LEDs blink together, the bit value is 1.


When only one LED blinks, the bit value is 0.

To see an example of an error code displayed in this way, do the following:

D Remove the loop–back connector from the front panel of the DASM II–VDB.

D SW 1 position 0 is closed.

D SW 1 position 1 is open.

D Now cycle the AC power on the DASM

D When the first pass of the DASM self–test has completed, the LED display begins. The expected error
is 5 (RS–422 port fail), and the LED sequence is:
Least significant first:
bit 0 = 2 LEDs on = 1 Value 1
bit 1 = 1 LED on = 0
bit 2 = 2 LEDs on = 1 Value 4
bit 3 = 1 LED on =0

Table 1–11 Serial Error Codes in LEDs


LED sequence, from left to right

Checksum 1211 checksum of EPROM


Serial 2121 RS422 test–needs loop–back
connector
DMA_setup 1112 Tests DASM Block
Image_verify 2112 tests full image transfer
DASM Block 2222 nonspecific failure. SCSI to host
is needed

1–20 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-6 RUN–TIME Error Codes


These codes may be found in the DASM Response Block byte 128, when the error bit (bit 2, where bit 0 is first) is
set in Response Block byte 0. Only the first of multiple errors is stored in Response Block byte 128. Reading the
Response Block clears the error. Note that the status “invalid command” is returned to the user directly in bit 0 of
the SCSI status byte; it is not logged in the Response Block.

Table 1–12 DASM Run Time Error Codes

Error Hex Meaning


General Error Codes
E_PARAM 81 Bad parameter to valid command
E_NO_FF 82 No 0xFF terminator in command
E_TMO 83 Timeout
E_PIF_SELF 84 Peripheral interface self–test error
E_PIFNOTRDY 85 Peripheral device not ready
E_OVRRUN 86 Data overrun
E_UNDRUN 87 Data under run
E_COM_LINK 88 Communications link error between DASM and PIF
E_DRAM 8A Error in I/O RAM
(Note: This is a warning, which is available in the trace buffer in the
DASM response block. During a warning, byte 128 is not updated.)
E_EPROM 8B EPROM checksum error
E_MFP 8C Error in the MC68901 I/O and timer chip
E_SBIC 8D Error in access to SCSI bus interface chip
E_NOTIMER 8E No timer available (all in use)
E_INTERN 8F Internal system software error
E_INV_MSG B0 Invalid / unexpected message from device
E_BAD_S B1 Invalid S–record (from load routine)
E_ODD_ADR B2 Odd address passed to function
E_BOUNDS B3 I/O request overlapped buffer boundary
E_DIRECTION B4 I/O request direction is invalid
E_NOT_NXT B5 I/O request for data is out of sequence
E_AVAIL_CT B6 I/O request exceed available data count
E_PARITY B7 Parity error
E_PIF_REV B8 No PIF revision level supplied
E_TIMER_ID B9 Timer id error
(Continued)

1–21 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-6 RUN–TIME Error Codes (Continued)

Table 1–12 DASM Run Time Error Codes (Continued)

Error Hex Meaning


M_REJECTED 95 Message was <REJ>ected by partner
M_BADREPLY 96 Unexpected reply was received
E_NOTREADY 97 Camera is not ready
E_TIMEOUT 98 EXEC Function did not complete in time
E_TOOLONG 99 Received telegram has too many characters
E_UNEXPECTED 9A Laser camera replied with an unexpected telegram
E_BADPARAM 9B Bad parameter from host found in CMDBLK
VRTX Error Codes
E_VRTX C1–F4 VRTX error range
– C1 Task ID invalid
– C2 No task control block available
– C3 No Memory available
– C4 No Memory block
– C5 Mailbox in use
– C6 Message of Zero
– C7 Buffer full
– C8 WAITC is in progress
– C9 Invalid system call
– CA Timeout
– CB No Message present
– CC Queue ID error
– CD Queue Full
– CE Partition ID error
– CF Fatal initialization error
– D0 No character present
– D1 Invalid configuration parameter at Init
– D2 Invalid parameter to PCREATE/PEXTEND
– E0 No component vector table
– E1 Invalid component
(Continued)

1–22 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-3-6 RUN–TIME Error Codes (Continued)

Table 1–12 DASM Run Time Error Codes (Continued)

Error Hex Meaning


– E2 Invalid opcode for component
– F0 No control block available
– F1 Event flag group or semaphore ID error
– F2 Tasks pending on event flag group or semaphore
– F3 Event flag group or semaphore is deleted
– F4 Event flag group already set or overflow

1–23 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4 DASM II–LCAM (2191524–2)

1-3-4-1 DASM II–LCAM LED Indicators


The DASM II–LCAM front panel has four LEDs, which are used for status and error information. These lights are
illustrated below:

PIF
SCSI
CPU
PWR

4 2 1

From left to right, the lights indicate the following:

D PIF
Personality Interface light indicates a data transfer from the Common Memory to the LCAM circuitry.

D SCSI
This light indicates the host is accessing the DASM via the SCSI bus, such as commands sent or data
received.

D CPU
This light indicates that the DASM CPU is active and operating properly. It flashes continuously ( “blinks”
on and off) following power–up.

D PWR
Power Light indicates that the DASM is powered. If this light does not illuminate at power–up, you should
first check the power cord connections.

1–24 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-2 Start–up Sequence


When the DASM II–LCAM is powering up, it performs start–up diagnostics and other related actions.

At power–up, the DASM Controller performs the following tests:

D EPROM checksum test

D MFP 68901 access test (the Multi Function Peripheral chip controls the serial port, timing, and I/O)

D SCSI register access test

D Static RAM test

D Dynamic RAM test

D DMA test

When the DASM CPU LED blinks continuously at about two flashes per second, the initialization sequence is com-
plete.

If an error occurs, the error condition is reported by blinking the CPU, SCSI, and PIF LEDs in tandem followed by an
error code.

Powering On
The following sequence occurs on the front panel’s LEDs when the power switch is turned on:

1. The Power LED lights.

2. The octal SCSI ID flashes briefly. The Least Significant Bit is next to the Power LED. Note that if the SCSI ID
is zero, no LEDs flash.

3. The three LEDs flash once and go out.

4. Once the power–up sequence completes, the DASM CPU LED (second light from right) blinks regularly, indicat-
ing that the CPU is active and functioning normally.

1–25 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-3 Self–Test Options


Once the start–up sequence is complete, the resident software reads the state of the DIP switch labeled SW1 on the
DASM II–LCAM board to determine whether further tests are enabled. To access SW1 you must first remove the
top cover. Upon locating SW1 you will notice the numbers 0, 1, and 2 silk screened on the printed circuit board.

SW1

1 2 3 4
2

–Open–
1
0
SP

The way Self–Test executes is determined by the setting shown below:

Switch Position Single Pass Continuous Mode Single Pass w/Me- Debug Mode
mory
0 Closed Open Closed Open
1 Closed Closed Closed Open
2 Closed Closed Open Open
Note: SW1 position marked “SP” is not used.

D Single Pass:
Is the default setting, and is the only setting allowed when connected to a laser camera.The start–up diag-
nostics execute once, as described in 1-3-4-2 Start–up Sequence.

D Continuous Mode:
After executing the start–up diagnostic, the resident software will continuously run the LCAM self–test.
Self–test will continue until the first SCSI command is received by the DASM. Please be aware that when
position 0 is open error and other messages encountered during start–up diagnostics are directed to the
serial port. Otherwise the errors are encoded on the LEDs.

D Single Pass w/Memory:


Is controlled by Bit 2. When setting to “open”, the DASM exercises the entire DRAM during the start–up
diagnostics. The Single Pass w/Memory test can take several minutes to complete, this is why it is normal-
ly disabled.

D Debug Mode:
When position 1 is open, the program jumps to the I/O Monitor when a diagnostic error occurs. The I/O
Monitor gives the basic tools to debug the hardware. Opening positions 0 and 2 allows the technician
access to the start–up diagnostic suite via the serial port.

1–26 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-4 Start–up Problem


To report diagnostic conditions, the LEDs on the DASM II–LCAM front panel have a corresponding binary representa-
tion. The illustration 1–8 below shows the value assigned to each LED. The section after the figure explains how the
LEDs represent error codes. Note that this sections deals with error codes related to the DASM Controller, where
Section 1-3-4-5, LCAM Error Codes, explains the method used to report an error from the LCAM diagnostic.

DASM Controller LED Error Codes


Using LEDs 2 and 4, a binary code signals any of the conditions listed in Table 1–13. The Power light and PIF LEDs
are not used to report diagnostic conditions.

The three LEDs permit a combined total of only seven error codes. To overcome this limitation, the codes are defined
as a series of one or more patterns. Each pattern begins with all LEDs flashing briefly, to indicate the start of the num-
ber sequence that follows.

For example, to display error code 12 (Failed SCSI Interface Test), the CPU LED displays the first digit (1), stopping
briefly before the SCSI LED displays the second digit (2), as shown in Illustration 1–8.

Illustration 1–8 LED Error Code Sequence

+ + = 12

All Flash “1” “2”


Short Long Long

The display of each digit lasts approximately four times the duration of the initial binary “7” (that is, the flash of all
LEDs). The pattern then repeats. Only the significant digits for each error condition are listed in Table 1–13.

Note:
The first error stops the start–up sequence immediately.

1–27 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-4 Start–up Problem (Continued)

Table 1–13 DASM Controller Start–up Error Conditions

Value Significance
1 Failed To Set Timer
2 Failed To Set Baud Rate
3 Failed To Access Receiver Status Reg. For Serial I/O
4 Failed To Start Refresh Clock
5 Failed In Set Up Of Serial I/O
6 Checksum Failed
7 Failed Static RAM Test
11 Failed I/O RAM Test
12 Failed SCSI Interface Test
13 Failed To Start VRTXE Operating System
21 Bus Error
22 Address Error
23 Illegal Instruction
24 Undefined MFP (MC68901) Interrupt
25 Zero–divide – Through Trace Trap Level 5
26 Chk, Trapv, Privilege, Or Trace Interrupt
31 Unknown Interrupt

1–28 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-5 LCAM Error Codes


The following sequence is used to signal an error during the LCAM portion of the Self–test.

First, all three LEDs blink together for the duration of a single pass. This requires approximately 10–15 seconds.
Then the specific error code blinks twice before the next pass begins, with all three LEDs blinking together as before.

The bit pattern of the error codes appears as a series of LEDs being turned on and off. The low order bit is first.

When two LEDs blink together, the bit value is 1.


When only one LED blinks, the bit value is 0.

The Self–test runs in continuous mode when SW 1 position 0 is “open”. A single failure will cause a error code to flash
repreatedly on the LEDs. Although, other errors may occur during testing only the first one is displayed forever.

First all LEDs will blink together several times indicates a problem. Next, the error code is displayed serially, twice
in the two leftmost LEDs.

The pattern is binary and takes 4 blinks for the complete code. When the two LEDs blink together, the bit value is
1, when only blinks the bit is 0. The bit order is low to high.

Record the blink pattern in the number of LEDs blinking, 1 or 2.

Record them RIGHT to LEFT, to make them easier to interpret.

1 2 1 2 Subtract 1 from each digit to obtain the bit value.


0 1 0 1 The value of the code is 5.

Error code meanings:


1: DMA time–out Bypass active
2: data error. Bypass active
3: data error. ROI active
4: data error. Bypass, ROI active
5: DMA time–out. Swap & bypass active
6: data error. Swap & bypass active
7: data error. Swap active
8: data error. Swap & ROI active
9: data error. Swap, ROI active
14:SRAM LUT error
No others are defined.

1–29 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-6 RUN–TIME Error Codes


These codes may be found in the DASM Response Block byte 128, when the error bit (bit 2, where bit 0 is first) is
set in Response Block byte 0. Only the first of multiple errors is stored in Response Block byte 128. Reading the
Response Block clears the error. Note that the status “invalid command” is returned to the user directly in bit 0 of
the SCSI status byte; it is not logged in the Response Block.

Table 1–14 DASM Run Time Error Codes

Error Hex Meaning


General Error Codes
E_PARAM 81 Bad parameter to valid command
E_NO_FF 82 No 0xFF terminator in command
E_TMO 83 Timeout
E_PIF_SELF 84 Peripheral interface self–test error
E_PIFNOTRDY 85 Peripheral device not ready
E_OVRRUN 86 Data overrun
E_UNDRUN 87 Data under run
E_COM_LINK 88 Communications link error between DASM and PIF
E_DRAM 8A Error in I/O RAM
(Note: This is a warning, which is available in the trace buffer in the
DASM response block. During a warning, byte 128 is not updated.)
E_EPROM 8B EPROM checksum error
E_MFP 8C Error in the MC68901 I/O and timer chip
E_SBIC 8D Error in access to SCSI bus interface chip
E_NOTIMER 8E No timer available (all in use)
E_INTERN 8F Internal system software error
E_INV_MSG B0 Invalid / unexpected message from device
E_BAD_S B1 Invalid S–record (from load routine)
E_ODD_ADR B2 Odd address passed to function
E_BOUNDS B3 I/O request overlapped buffer boundary
E_DIRECTION B4 I/O request direction is invalid
E_NOT_NXT B5 I/O request for data is out of sequence
E_AVAIL_CT B6 I/O request exceed available data count
E_PARITY B7 Parity error
E_PIF_REV B8 No PIF revision level supplied
E_TIMER_ID B9 Timer id error
(Continued)

1–30 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-6 RUN–TIME Error Codes (Continued)

Table 1–12 DASM Run Time Error Codes (Continued)

Error Hex Meaning


M_REJECTED 95 Message was <REJ>ected by partner
M_BADREPLY 96 Unexpected reply was received
E_NOTREADY 97 Camera is not ready
E_TIMEOUT 98 EXEC Function did not complete in time
E_TOOLONG 99 Received telegram has too many characters
E_UNEXPECTED 9A Laser camera replied with an unexpected telegram
E_BADPARAM 9B Bad parameter from host found in CMDBLK
VRTX Error Codes
E_VRTX C1–F4 VRTX error range
– C1 Task ID invalid
– C2 No task control block available
– C3 No Memory available
– C4 No Memory block
– C5 Mailbox in use
– C6 Message of Zero
– C7 Buffer full
– C8 WAITC is in progress
– C9 Invalid system call
– CA Timeout
– CB No Message present
– CC Queue ID error
– CD Queue Full
– CE Partition ID error
– CF Fatal initialization error
– D0 No character present
– D1 Invalid configuration parameter at Init
– D2 Invalid parameter to PCREATE/PEXTEND
– E0 No component vector table
– E1 Invalid component
(Continued)

1–31 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-3-4-6 RUN–TIME Error Codes (Continued)

Table 1–12 DASM Run Time Error Codes (Continued)

Error Hex Meaning


– E2 Invalid opcode for component
– F0 No control block available
– F1 Event flag group or semaphore ID error
– F2 Tasks pending on event flag group or semaphore
– F3 Event flag group or semaphore is deleted
– F4 Event flag group already set or overflow

1–32 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

1-4 OTHER BOARDS

Table 1–15 NAA1 LED Description

LED Description
POWER (LED1) Lights while power is supplied.

Illustration 1–9 NAA1

POWER
LED1

CN1
CN4 CN2 CN3

1–33 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

1–34 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

SECTION 2 – TEST PROGRAMS

2-1 SYSTEM POWER–UP SEQUENCE


The power–ON test program is used for OC self–diagnostics during the Power up sequence.

This test program has two categories; Power On Test and Off–line Test (Detailed Power On test).
The Off–line test includes more detailed tests than power–on Test, and takes longer to run.
The power–on Test is normally selected automatically when powering ON the system. The Off–line test can be used
by the field engineer to perform a more detailed analysis in the event of an error occurring on the system.

The power–on test is described in Section 2-2.

Even if errors occur during the power–on test, the test continues to be executed until it finishes, and the test log window
appears. You can confirm the problem by reviewing test log, then select either of the following:

D [H/W diag] :
Go to [H/W diag Main Menu] for OFF–LINE test

Note
For more detail, refer to 2-3 Off–line Test.

D [Startup] :
The error is skipped and the power–on sequence proceeds so that the start–up screen will be shown on
the CRT monitor.

Note
When the start–up screen does NOT appear even if using the [Startup] command, the system must
be shutdown using [shutdown] button in the desktop menu.

D [Shutdown] :
The system runs the shutdown sequence, resulting in the system powered OFF automatically.

2–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-2 POWER–ON TEST


The power–on test is automatically executed after the operating system becomes ready and before the system soft-
ware starts.
If you want to manually start the power–on Test, execute ‘Application Shutdown’ from the System Tools menu, and
execute the following command in the Unix shell.

> poweron

The following tests are performed during the power–on test.

D hinv Test:
Checks that the devices which are listed in the reference file created during the Reconfig procedure are
identified as correctly installed on the operator console.

D SCSI Test:
Performs ‘inquiry’ and ‘self–test’ on each SCSI device. A read and write test on the media is not performed.
The tested devices are those which were listed during the Reconfig procedure.

D NPR Test:
Performs an access test on memory devices installed on the NPR (NP Recon Engine) boards. As for
NPRS boards, only the NPRS1 board is tested. Perform the off–line test ( described in Section 2-3) to test
other NPRS boards.

D DBPCI Test:
Performs an access test on the DAS Buffer Memory and registers.

2–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3 OFF–LINE TEST

NOTICE
When the interactive test or off–line test is completed, the system MUST be powered OFF
([Exit] –> [OK]) to avoid accidental X–ray Exposure. That is because system reboot can NOT
activate the system reset line.

2-3-1 General
This is a test to verify that access to memory/register of NPR or DBPCI boards is performed with no error. In off–line
mode, the following two modes exists.

D Stop mode:
The test will stop when error occurs.

D Continue mode:
The test will proceed without stop when error occurs. The error occurred can be checked by viewing error
log after test. However, there is a much possibility that Memory/Register have been overwritten, so that
you can NOT confirm which the error occurred in read phase or in write phase.

Each mode above contains the following three test methods. (You can edit them whenever you want.)

– Normal:
All of the test items can be run.
It takes approx. 60 minutes for the longest time. (This depends on hardware configuration.)

– Quick:
A part of the test items can be run. It takes shorter than “Normal” to complete.
It takes approx. 50 minutes for the longest time. (This depends on hardware configuration.)

– Manual:
The test items can be manually selected to run the tests for the specific item to be desired.
The default setting is the same one as “Normal”.

NOTICE
Do not use the manual test until you perfectly understand each test items in the manual test.
Some memories or registers contain access prohibitive areas. If you change this area acci-
dentally, the system hung–up often occurred.

2–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-2 Running Off–Line Test


1. Select [Service] –> [Diagnostics & analysis] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Offline Test] .
The Off–line test menu appears.

2. Select either [Stop] or [Continue] in response to “WHEN ERROR OCCUR”.

3. Select from among three mode;


NORMAL, QUICK, or MANUAL in response to “TEST MODE”.

Usually, select [Stop] and [Quick]. See Illustration 2–1.

Illustration 2–1 Parameter Selection

Select

4. When [Quick] is selected, go to step 7.


When [Normal] or [Manual] is selected, go to next step.

5. Select either [NPR] or [DBPCI] to determine which board can be tested.

D NPR: NPRM, NPRS, and NPRIF

2–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-2 Running Off–Line Test (Continued)


6. Select either [PCI TEST] or [INTERNAL TEST].

D PCI test:
This test accesses NPR (GM, CM, and Master DSP’s IM) and DBPCI (DBM and all registers) from PCI
(System) bus.

D Internal test:
Check whether or not the DPI0 on the NPR board can be accessed to each memory.

Note
Each test has the edit window to select programs to be desired. For brief information of this program
to be edited, refer to 2-3-4 Editing Off–line Test Program.

7. Click on [RUN] to start off–line test. See Illustration 2–2.


While executing tests, “Running” appears on the left lower button (Result/View Log button).
This off–line test checks hardware, NPR PCI –> NPR Internal –> DBPCI#0 –> DBPCI#1, in this order.

Illustration 2–2 Run the Test

Click to run the test

Note
When aborting the Off–Line test on the way, press the [Stop Now] button.

2–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-2 Running Off–Line Test (Continued)


8. Verify that “Pass” appears on the Result/View Log button after completing the test.

Note
If “Error” appears, click on this [Error] button to open the NPR log viewer and display the detailed
information (device driver permission, etc...).
This error log will be deleted when performing the next test or shuting down the system.
See also the tables in Section 2-4, Hardware to be Used in Hardware Diagnostics.

9. To return to [H/W Diag Main Menu], click on [Back].

2–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-3 Viewing the Log File


The log files can be opened without entering the H/W Diagnostics. Therefore, the system does not need to be shut
down even if the log file viewer is terminated.

In this program, the following menu can be seen to display each log file:

D Diag View Log:


For viewing the general log file for Diagnostics test

D View P–ON Test Log:


For viewing the result of power–ON test

D H/W inventory:
For viewing the result of hinv

D View SYSLOG:
For viewing the system log since the latest system start–up

1. Select [Service] –> [Diagnostics & analysis] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [View Log] .
The log file selection menu appears.

2. Select the related menu.

3. Click on [Back] to return to Service menu.

2–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-4 Editing Off–line Test Program


When clicking on [Detail], the following menu appears. Using this menu, you can run the test or edit the off–line test
program one by one. The editing information can be seen in the view screen:

Illustration 2–3 Off–line test run/edit menu

EDIT AREA

PROGRAM DISPLAY

EDIT AREA

PROGRAM DISPLAY

Set Default:
returns to the program setting to the default one, so that the information edited are canceled.

2–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-4 Editing Off–line Test Program (Continued)


In the Program display area, the test items (programs) can be seen. To edit these programs, use the edit area above
the program display screen.

NOTICE
The personnel familiar with this program ONLY can edit these program. If others edit them,
the wrong tests would be performed or the system would hung–up.

Note
For DBPCI (both Normal and Quick), the internal test does NOT exist.

The Illustration 2–4 is the example (Normal–NPR–Internal) of programs to be displayed (and to be edited).

Illustration 2–4 Meaning of Program (PCI Detail)

Driver No.:
Test loop No. 00: NPR
10 : DBPCI#0
11 : DBPCI#1 Size

5 1 MemoryBitWalk 10 0 400000 0 0
Line No.
Offset address

Initial shift
Test Program: Polarity
MemoryBitWalk : PIO, bitwalk
MemoryFill : PIO, constant increment/
decrement
MemoryDMA : DMA transmission
RegTest : PI0 access to each register

2–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-4 Editing Off–line Test Program (Continued)

Illustration 2–5 Meaning of Program (NPR Internal Detail)

mst : executed by master DSP Test target :


gm (global memory), pm (private memory), cm
slv : executed by slave DSP
(communication memory), sim (slave internal
Test loop No. memory), and spm (slave private memory)
Start slave No. : slave DSP No. to start IM test

Slave count : slave DSP count to perform IM test

1 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 1000000 0 0


Line No.
Offset address

Driver No.:
Size (Fill memory size)
00: NRP
Test Program:
MemoryBitWalk : PIO, bitwalk Fill Data pattern
MemoryFill : PIO, constant increment/
decrement
Transmission mode
0: constant
1: increment
2: decrement

2–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-3-5 Off–line Test Time


Time required to Off–line test depends on the hardware configuration. The following tables can be used as a reference
to estimate test time.

GM=32 MB, NPRS= 0 to 8 boards

GM=32MB
NPRS
0 1 2 4 8
Normal Mode NPR PCI 0:27:09 0:27:09 0:27:09 0:27:09 0:27:09
NPR Internal 0:06:19 0:07:15 0:08:06 0:10:01 0:14:33
DBPCI 0:03:37 0:03:37 0:03:37 0:03:37 0:03:37
SUM 0:37:05 0:38:01 0:38:52 0:40:47 0:45:19

Quick Mode NPR PCI 0:03:40 0:03:40 0:03:40 0:03:40 0:03:40


NPR Internal 0:00:40 0:01:29 0:02:13 0:03:54 0:07:58
DBPCI 0:00:33 0:00:33 0:00:33 0:00:33 0:00:33
SUM 0:04:53 0:05:42 0:06:26 0:08:07 0:12:11

GM=64 MB, NPRS= 0 to 8 boards

GM=64MB
NPRS
0 1 2 4 8
Normal Mode NPR PCI 0:54:18 0:54:18 0:54:18 0:54:18 0:54:18
NPR Internal 0:12:01 0:13:24 0:14:43 0:17:29 0:18:47
DBPCI 0:07:14 0:07:14 0:07:14 0:07:14 0:07:14
SUM 1:13:33 1:14:56 1:16:15 1:19:01 1:20:19

Quick Mode NPR PCI 0:07:20 0:07:20 0:07:20 0:07:20 0:07:20


NPR Internal 0:01:14 0:02:26 0:03:39 0:06:14 0:12:03
DBPCI 0:01:06 0:01:06 0:01:06 0:01:06 0:01:06
SUM 0:09:40 0:10:52 0:12:05 0:14:40 0:20:29

2–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

2–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-4 HARDWARE TO BE USED IN HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS


The following tables shows the hardware configuration to be used in the Hardware Diagnostics.
2-4-1 Interactive Test
Refer to Functional check/Adjustment for details of this test.

Table 2–1 Interactive Test

Monitor O2 video VSPL Monitor Cable


Monitor f f f 141, Monitor
Keyboard O2 serial O2 KB Rear CN1 Keyboard PCI DBPCI
Scan Key f f f 133, KB
103 Key f f f 134, KB
Cradle f f f KB
Tilt f f f KB
KB Reset f f f f f 131, 133, KB,
PCI
Audio O2 PCI O2 audio O2 SCSI DBPCI Rear CN1 NAA1 CDROM
Volume f f f f 131, 138, PCI
mod/freq/ f f f f 131, 138, PCI
width
Xray ON f f f f 131, 138, PCI
Alert ON f f f f 131, 138, PCI
Auto Voice f f f 136, 138
CD Player f f f f 137, 147, 148
Play back f f f f 131, 138, PCI
Note
WS: Workstation, KB: Keyboard, HINV: Hardware inventory, SYSLOG: System Log

2–13 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-4-1 Interactive Test (Continued)

Table 2–1 Interactive Test (Continued)

MISC O2 SCSI De- PCI Device NPSC NPR DBPCI Rear CN1 Front PNL
vice
HINV f f f f 146, 147, 148,
PCI
SYSLOG f f PCI
SCSI f f f 146, 147, 148
NPR LED f f f PCI
Safety Loop f f f f 131, PCI
Shutdown f f f Y 131, 143, PCI
WS Default O2 Rear CN2 Mouse
Mouse f f f 140, Mouse
Monitor Monitor
Audio Auto Voice
Note
WS: Workstation, KB: Keyboard, HINV: Hardware inventory, SYSLOG: System Log

2–14 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-4-2 Off–line NPR Test

Table 2–2 Off–line NPR Test

O2 PCI NPRIF NPRM NPRS


Brid
ge
All All PCI INT2 MDS GM CM PM LP INT2 CR SDS (GM) SPM LP CR INT
chip DSP P PCI P 2DS
P
Program Tar- Mas- PCI Mas-
Name get ter ter
NPR f f f f f f Y
PCI
MemoryFill GM f f f f
CM f f f f
IM f f f f
MemoryBit- GM f f f f
Walk
CM f f f f
IM f f f f
MemoryDMA GM f f DMA f Y
C
Note
MDSP: Master DSP, GM: Global Memory, PM: Private Memory, SIM: Slave Internal Memory, CR: Communication Register, SDSP: Slave DSP, CM:
Communication Memory, LP: Link Port, SPM: Slave Private Memory, INT2: Interrupt To

2–15 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 2–2 Off–line NPR Test (Continued)

O2 PCI NPRIF NPRM NPRS


Brid
ge
All All PCI INT2 MDS GM CM PM LP INT2 CR SDS (GM) SPM LP CR INT
chip DSP P PCI P 2DS
P
Program Tar- Mas- PCI Mas-
Name get ter ter
NPR f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Internal
Master MemoryFill GM f f f f f f f f
CM f f f f f f f f
PM f f f f f f f f f
SIM f f f f f f f f f
SPM f f f f f f f f f
MemoryBit- GM f f f f f f f f
Walk
CM f f f f f f f f
PM f f f f f f f f f
SIM f f f f f f f f f
SPM f f f f f f f f f
Register
Link Port LP f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Note
MDSP: Master DSP, GM: Global Memory, PM: Private Memory, SIM: Slave Internal Memory, CR: Communication Register, SDSP: Slave DSP, CM:
Communication Memory, LP: Link Port, SPM: Slave Private Memory, INT2: Interrupt To

2–16 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

Table 2–2 Off–line NPR Test (Continued)

O2 PCI NPRIF NPRM NPRS


Brid
ge
All All PCI INT2 MDS GM CM PM LP INT2 CR SDS (GM) SPM LP CR INT
chip DSP P PCI P 2DS
P
Program Tar- Mas- PCI Mas-
Name get ter ter
Slave MemoryFill GM f f f f f f f f f f f f f
PM f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
MemoryBit- GM f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Walk
PM f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Register
Note
MDSP: Master DSP, GM: Global Memory, PM: Private Memory, SIM: Slave Internal Memory, CR: Communication Register, SDSP: Slave DSP, CM:
Communication Memory, LP: Link Port, SPM: Slave Private Memory, INT2: Interrupt To

2–17 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 11 2202119

2-4-3 Off–line DBPCI Test

Table 2–3 Off–line DBPCI Test

O2 PCI Bridge DBPCI


All All PCI chip DBM DA Regs TREQ DBMEN INT2PCI
Regs
Program Target PCI
Name
PCI f f f f f f f f
MemoryFill DBM f f f f
MemoryBit- DBM f f f f
Walk
MemoryD- DBM f f DMAC f f f f f
MA
Register DA Regs f f f f
TREQ Regs f f f f
DBMEN f f f f
Note
DBM: DAS Buffer Memory, DA Regs: DAS Address Counter Registers, TREQ Regs: Transfer Request Counter Registers, DBMEN: DBM Enable, INT2:
Interrupt To, PCI Bridge: PCI Host card + (plus) PCI Backplane + (plus) BP Controller card

2–18 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

SECTION 3 – HOST PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING

3-1 PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS


If you suspect there is a problem with your hardware, use the flowchart (Illustration 3–1) to help isolate and solve the
problem. To view the flowchart, use the magnification function. See also Diagnostic Tests (Section 3-2).

Illustration 3–1 Diagnostic Flow Chart #1

Solid Solid Blinking Solid


SYMPTOM

No LED No boot No B
No red No amber No amber No No green
tune
LED LED LED LED

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


POSSIBLE CAUSE

“ No power to system “ CPU module failure “ System board failure “ Memory diagnostic failure “ Volume set too low “ System diagnostics
“ Power supply failure “ Headphones plugged in successful
“ Speaker failure

“ Check power “ Re–seat CPU module “ Re–seat CPU module “ Verify slots 1 and 2 are “ Turn up volume
POSSIBLE SOLUTION

connections “ Re–seat DIMMS on populated “ Check if headphones


system board “ Re–seat DIMMs on system are connected
board

Error
code
Yes message
?

“ Record message

“ Replace power supply “ Replace CPU module “ Replace system board “ Replace DIMMs “ Replace system board
“ Replace chassis

3–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-1 PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS (continued)

Illustration 3–2 Diagnostic Flow Chart #2

Solid Solid

SYMPTOM
green LED green LED Solid
Solid green LED No keyboard No mouse green LED Solid green LED Wrong Date or
B No No No No No
No display Keyboard prompt Mouse prompt No system No CD–ROM Time Displayed
on display on display drive

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

POSSIBLE CAUSE
“ Monitor not connected “ Keyboard not connected “ Mouse not connected “ System drive not inserted “ CD–ROM drive not “ Battery in the RTC on
“ Monitor not turned on “ Keyboard failure “ Keyboard not connected all the way connected the system module run
“ Monitor in power saving “ System board failure “ Mouse failure “ System drive failure “ CD–ROM drive failure down.
mode “ Keyboard failure
“ Monitor brightness too low “ System board failure
“ Cable failure
“ Monitor failure
“ System board failure

“ Check monitor connections “ Check keyboard connection “ Check mouse connection “ Check that system drive “ Check CD–ROM “ Replace the RTC
“ Turn on monitor “ Check keyboard connection locking lever is pushed up connections

POSSIBLE SOLUTION
“ Check monitor LED all the way
“ Adjust monitor brightness

Error Error Error Error


code code code code
Yes Yes Yes Yes
message? message? message? message?

“ Record message No “ Record message No “ Record message No “ Record message No

“ Replace monitor cable “ Replace keyboard “ Replace mouse “ Replace system drive “ Replace CD–ROM drive
“ Replace monitor “ Replace system board “ Replace system board
“ Replace system board

NOTICE
RTC Battery Temporary Solution:
If the RTC cannot be gotten yet and a customer system shows a wrong date, first the set date
and time using Application Shutdown > Date Setting. Then start up the system.
For this temporary recovered system, the OC main switch MUST not be powered OFF after
shutdown. To use the system again, only click on Restart button.
This mean that the date and time will be back to the wrong indication if the power is removed
from the system.

3–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-2 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS


There are three types of software diagnostics tests provided on the O2 workstation. Each is described below:

D Power–On Tests

D IDE Tests

Power–On Test
These run automatically on the major hardware components of the workstation each time it is turned on. If the tests
find a faulty part, the LED on the front of the system will be red and there will probably be an error message. See also
Problem Diagnosis (Section 3-1).

IDE Tests
The Interactive Diagnostic Environment (IDE) tests are more comprehensive than the Confidence Tests, and take
longer (as long as 30–45 minutes) to run. See Integrated Diagnostic Environment (IDE) Tests on the SBC (O2) (Sec-
tion 3-5).

3–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-3 RECOVERING FROM SYSTEM CRASH


In most cases, your system will recover from a system crash automatically if you reboot the system.
If, however, you have lost data on your system disk, and you cannot communicate with your system using the mouse
or keyboard, or over the network, follow these instructions. The instructions assume you have a backup tape of your
system that has been made using the System Manager backup tool, or with the /usr/sbin/Backup script. You also need
a CD with your current IRIX operating system level. If you are recovering data from a tape on a remote tape device,
you need to know the hostname, tape device name, and IP address of the remote system.

1. Use a pen tip or an unwound paper clip to press the RESET button located on the front panel (Illustration 3–3).

Illustration 3–3 Pressing the Reset Button

Silicon-
Graphics

2. When you see the System Startup notifier (Illustration 3–4), click STOP FOR MAINTENANCE or press ESC.

Illustration 3–4 System Startup Notifier

3–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-3 RECOVERING FROM SYSTEM CRASH (continued)


3. From the System Maintenance menu, choose RECOVER SYSTEM, or type 4 on the keyboard. The System
Recovery Menu appears (Illustration 3–5).

Illustration 3–5 System Recovery Menu

4. If you have a CD–ROM drive connected to your system and the IRIX CD, click LOCAL CD–ROM. Then click
ACCEPT to start. Insert the CD when prompted. The system takes five minutes or more to copy the information.
If you don -
MOTE DIRECTORY.

5. When a notifier appears asking you for the remote hostname, type the system’s name, a colon (:), and the full
pathname of the CD–ROM drive, followed by /dist. For example, to access a CD–ROM drive. On the system
mars, you would type: mars:/CDROM/dist
After everything is copied from the CD to the system disk, you can restore your data from a recent full backup
tape. The backup must be one that has been made using the System Manager backup tool, or with the /usr/sbin/
Backup script.
Tip: If you need to check something on your system during the restore process, you can get a
shell prompt by typing sh at most question prompts.

6. If you have a local tape device, you see this message:

Restore will be from <tapename> OK? ([Y]es, [N]o): [Y]

tapename is the name of the local tape device.

3–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-3 RECOVERING FROM SYSTEM CRASH (continued)


7. If you have a remote (network) tape device, when no tape device is found, or when you answered ‘No’ to the
question in the previous step, you see this message:

Remote or local restore ([r]emote, [l]ocal):

– If you answer ‘remote,’ you have chosen to restore from the network, and you must know the hostname, tape
device name, and IP address of the remote system. You also need to know the IP address of your system. The
IP address, such as 192.0.2.1, always has four components separated by periods.
– If you answer ‘local,’ you have chosen a tape device that is connected to your system, and you are prompted
to enter the name of the tape device.

8. When you see the following message, remove the CD–ROM, insert your most recent full backup tape, then press
ENTER.

Insert the first backup tape in the drive, then press <Enter>,
[q]uit (from recovery), [r]estart:

There is a pause while the program retrieves several files from the tape describing the system state at the time
the backup was made. Then you see this message:

Erase /x filesystem and make new one (y,n)? [n]

It prompts you for every file system that was known at the time of the backup. Read the following to decide wheth-
er to answer y or n.
– If you answer n for no, the system tries to salvage as many files as possible. Then it uses your backup tape
to replace the files it could not salvage. Usually you should answer no, especially if your backup tape is not very
recent. If the file systems were badly damaged, or the backup was from a different level operating system, you
may need to answer yes.
– – If you answer y for yes, the system erases the file system and copies everything from your backup tape to
the disk. The system loses any information on that file system that you created between now and when you made
your backup tape.

9. You see this message:

Starting recovery from tape.

After two or three minutes, the names of the files that the system is copying to the disk start scrolling. When the
recovery is complete, you see this message:

Recovery complete, restarting system.

Note
If your backup tapes were old, or you were changing your operating system level, you should reinstall
the operating system from the IRIX CD that came with your system after system recovery is com-
plete. When you see the Startup System notifier, press ESC, or click STOP FOR MAINTENANCE.
Then click Install System Software.

3–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-4 DISABLING THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PASSWORD


If you are in the System Maintenance menu, and you choose INSTALL SYSTEM SOFTWARE, RUN DIAGNOSTICS,
RECOVER SYSTEM, or ENTER COMMAND MONITOR, you may be prompted for a password.

If you do not know the password, you can disable it by installing a jumper (a small cap that connects two pins) on the
system board inside the workstation. The system board is located in the system module. To install the jumper, you
must first remove the system module and the PCI tray. Follow these steps:

1. Turn off the workstation by pressing the power button on the front.

2. Remove the system module by releasing the lever on the extreme left as you face the rear of the workstation
and sliding the module out. See Section 1–6 System Module, of OC Tabl of the Component Replacement manual.

3. Release and remove the PCI tray. See Section 1–8 PCI Tray, of OC Tabl of the Component Replacement manual.

NOTICE
Before touching any of the components, attach the wrist strap to your wrist and to a metal
part of the chassis.

4. Remove the jumper from the system board in the location shown in Illustration 3–6.

You must remove the jumper if you choose to reset the PROM password.

Illustration 3–6 Removing the Jumper

Jumper

3–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-4 DISABLING THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PASSWORD (continued)


5. Reinstall the jumper in the location shown in Illustration 3–7.

Illustration 3–7 Installing the Jumper

6. Remove the wrist strap.

7. Reinstall the PCI tray in the system module.

8. Reinstall the system module by sliding it into the chassis.

3–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-5 INTEGRATED DIAGNOSTIC ENVIRONMENT (IDE) TESTS ON THE SBC (O2)


The IDE tests on the O2 are stand alone tests that must be run at the boot PROM level.

To run the O2 IDE tests from the OC, the user must first shut down applications. Next, cu into the SBC by opening
a UNIX shell and typing: cu sbc. Once a serial connection has been established, the O2 must be shut down and re–
started. Do this by logging into the SBC as root and typing the ‘halt’ command. Press ENTER when prompted to restart
the SBC. When the system begins start–up, a message appears giving the user the option of performing system main-
tenance. Press ESC at this prompt to get to the System Maintenance Menu. Choose Option 3, Run Diagnostics.
A hardware probe will be conducted and a default set of test scripts will be run automatically. This set takes approxi-
mately 10 minutes to execute. Pass and failure information is updated to the screen.

When you run the tests, the following error message may appear. However, ignore this message.

I2C register test HARDWARE FAILURE


DMA test error.

INITIATION OF THE O2 IDE TESTS


{ctuser@baya_oc}[2] su –
Password:
You have mail.
baya_oc 1# cu sbc
Connected

login: root
Password:
IRIX Release 6.5IP32 baya_sbc
Copyright 1987–1998 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Last login: Wed Jun 17 08:49:49 CDT 1998 on ttyd1
You have mail.

TERM = (vt100)
baya_sbc 1# halt
Shutdown started. Wed Jun 17 08:52:17 CDT 1998
Broadcast Message from root (ttyd1) on baya_sbc Wed Jun 17 08:52:17
1998

THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUT DOWN! Log off now.

INIT: New run level: 0


The system is shutting down.
Please wait.
Jun 17 08:52:45 automount[217]: exiting

3–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-5 INTEGRATED DIAGNOSTIC ENVIRONMENT (IDE) TESTS ON THE O2 (continued)


Running power–on diagnostics...
Okay to power off the system now.
Press any key to restart.
Starting up the system...
To perform system maintenance instead, press <Esc>

System Maintenance Menu

1) Start System
2) Install System Software
3) Run Diagnostics
4) Recover System
5) Enter Command Monitor

Option? 3

Starting diagnostic program...

Press <Esc> to return to the menu.

SGI Version 6.5 IP32 IDE field April 30, 1998

System: IP32
Processor: 200 or 250 Mhz R5000, with FPU
Primary I–cache size: 32 Kbytes
Primary D–cache size: 32 Kbytes
Memory size: 128 Mbytes
Graphics: CRM, Rev C
Network: DP83840–0
PCI Bus: MACE–PCI(0)
SCSI Disk: scsi(0)disk(1)
SCSI Disk: scsi(1)disk(1)

Ide included scripts are ’ip32 cpu graphics fast_mem memory


3–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 17 2202119

3-5 INTEGRATED DIAGNOSTIC ENVIRONMENT (IDE) TESTS ON THE O2 (continued)

Other Error Message


If the following error occurs, it indicates that the diagnostics start–up disk is set to disk(2).

pci(0)scsi(0)disk(2)rdisk(0)partition(X) /stand/ide:no such device

In this case, enter the following in the Enter Command Monitor (command input screen):

>resetenv <Enter>

Enter the following to confirm this response:OSloadPartition=pci(0)scsi(0)disk(1)rdisk(0)par-


tion(0).

>printenv <Enter>

Then, run the tests again.

3–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

3–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

SECTION 4 – NPR (RECON ENGINE) TROUBLESHOOTING

4-1 OVERVIEW
The Service menu contains the diagnostics for the recon system (NPRIF, NPRM, NPRS boards, and its related circuit-
ry, such as DBPCI board, etc.) This section describes how to use the diagnostics. The descriptions in this section are
more detailed ones than those in Section 2-3, Off–line Test.

Illustration 4–1 Troubleshooting Recon System

Trouble occurs in
the recon system.

Y
Error occurred
in Power–on
Test.
If you fall into a loop N
The system
in this flowchart, call N normally
On–line Center. booted up?

N N Is there NPRS
Error occurred Board whose F0
Y in Offline Test. LED is not
blinking?
Error oc- The system did not
curred in Auto Y boot up, due to other
Post Recon causes than the recon
Test. system. Y
N Perform the diag-
nostics described Replace the NPRS
in this section. whose F0 LED is
not blinking.
The trouble may be attributed to other than
the recon system. If bad images are the
problem, these units might be defective:
DASIFN, DBPCI, DTRF, DAS.
Trouble
(If more than one NPRS board are de- fixed?
fective, you may follow this way.) N

Illustration 4–1 shows a flowchart for troubleshooting the recon system.

Following the flowchart, if you find that an NPRS board seems to be malfunctioning, exchange the board with some
other NPRS board which is installed on another slot. And then, repeat the test, and you may be able to judge more
correctly whether the exchanged board is defective or not. In this case, if the exchanged board seems to be operating
normally, or an other board seems to be malfunctioning, the NPRM board might be defective.

4–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS


Select [Service] → [Diagnostics & analysis] → [H/W Diagnostics] → [Offline Test], to display the Off Line Test Menu.

Illustration 4–2 H/W Diag Main Menu and Off Line Test Menu

Select Offline Test.

Select STOP,
QUICK, NPR,
INTERNAL TEST,
and click RUN.

4–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)


Illustration 4–3 shows an example of a test result display after clicking the [RUN] button.
For each program description, refer to Section 2-3-4, ‘Editing Off–line Test Program.’

Illustration 4–3 Test Result Display

Program1 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 1 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 0 : PASS

Program2 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 2 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 0 : PASS

Program3 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 3 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 1 : PASS

Program4 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 4 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 2 : PASS

Program5 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 5 1 mst pm – – MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS

Program6 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 6 1 mst pm – – MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 0 : PASS
.
.
.

4–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)


Table 4–1 shows that, for each test program, a board (NPRIF, NPRM, NPRS, or DBPCI) which is considered to be
defective is indicated by ‘O’ if the test program failed.

Table 4–1 NPR – Internal Test

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI Remarks


Program1 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 1 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 0 : PASS
f The
Master
Program2 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 2 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f checks
the me-
mories
Program3 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 3 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 1 : PASS f (gm, pm,
and cm).
Program4 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 4 1 mst gm – – MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f
Program5 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 5 1 mst pm – – MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS f
Program6 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 6 1 mst pm – – MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f
Program7 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 7 1 mst pm – – MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 1 : PASS f
Program8 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 8 1 mst pm – – MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f
Program9 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 9 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 4000 C000 0 0 : PASS f
Program10 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 10 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 4000 C000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f
Program11 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 11 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 4000 C000 0 1 : PASS f
Program12 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 12 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 4000 C000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f
Program13 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 13 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS f The
Master
Program14 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 14 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f checks
the me-
mories
Program15 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 15 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 1 : PASS f on the
Slave.
Program16 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 16 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f
Program17 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 17 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryFill 00 A0000 20000 0 0 : PASS f
Program18 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 18 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryFill 00 A0000 20000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f
Program19 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 19 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryFill 00 A0000 20000 0 1 : PASS f
Program20 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 20 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryFill 00 A0000 20000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f

4–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)

Table 4–1 NPR – Internal Test (continued)

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI Remarks


Program21 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 21 1 mst gm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 0 0 : PASS f The
Master
Program22 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 22 1 mst gm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 0 1 : PASS f checks
the me-
mories
Program23 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 23 1 mst gm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 31 0 : PASS f (gm, pm,
and cm)
Program24 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 24 1 mst gm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 31 1 : PASS f with data
pattern
Program25 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 25 1 mst pm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS f different
from
Program26 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 26 1 mst pm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 0 1 : PASS f No.1 –12
tests.
Program27 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 27 1 mst pm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 31 0 : PASS f
Program28 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 28 1 mst pm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 31 1 : PASS f
Program29 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 29 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 4000 C000 0 0 : PASS f
Program30 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 30 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 4000 C000 0 1 : PASS f
Program31 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 31 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 4000 C000 31 0 : PASS f
Program32 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 32 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 4000 C000 31 1 : PASS f
Program33 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 33 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS f The
Master
Program34 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 34 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 0 1 : PASS f checks
the me-
mories
Program35 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 35 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 31 0 : PASS f on the
Slave
Program36 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 36 1 mst spm 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 100000 31 1 : PASS f with data
pattern
Program37 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 37 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 A0000 20000 0 0 : f different
PASS from
No.13–2
Program38 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 38 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 A0000 20000 0 1 : f 0 tests.
PASS

Program39 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst


Line List : 39 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 A0000 20000 31 0 : f
PASS

Program40 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst


Line List : 40 1 mst sim 1 16 MemoryBitWalk 00 A0000 20000 31 1 : f
PASS

4–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)

Table 4–1 NPR – Internal Test (continued)

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI Remarks


Program41 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 41 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 0 : PASS f f The
Slave
Program42 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 42 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f f checks
the me-
mories
Program43 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 43 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 1 : PASS f f (gm and
pm).
Program44 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 44 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f f
Program45 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 45 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS f
Program46 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 46 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f
Program47 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 47 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 1 : PASS f
Program48 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 48 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f
Program49 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 49 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 10008 FFF8 0 0 : PASS f The
Master
Program50 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 50 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 10008 FFF8 ffffffff 0 : PASS f checks
the
memory
Program51 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 51 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 10008 FFF8 0 1 : PASS f (cm).
Program52 : MemoryFill DSP : mst
Line List : 52 1 mst cm – – MemoryFill 00 10008 FFF8 ffffffff 2 : PASS f
Program53 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 53 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 10008 FFF8 0 0 : PASS f
Program54 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 54 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 10008 FFF8 0 1 : PASS f
Program55 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 55 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 10008 FFF8 31 0 : PASS f
Program56 : MemoryBitWalk DSP : mst
Line List : 56 1 mst cm – – MemoryBitWalk 00 10008 FFF8 31 1 : PASS f
Program57 : LpTest DSP : mst
Line List : 57 1 mst lp 10 – LpTest 00 – – – – : PASS f f Link Port
test
Note: When the Program 57 failed:
Replace the NPRS board, then perform program 57 again. Repeat this procedure (a maximum of eight times) until Program 57 test succeed. If
the error occurs, replace the NPRM board.

4–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)

How to Identify Defective NPRS – Phase 1


Run the NPR–Internal Test (Programs 1 to 57) to identify a defective NPRS board.

Several tests in NPR–internal test performs a test for each DSP (Digital Signal Processor–two DSPs are equipped
on one NPRS board) and indicates the result of each test by ‘PASS’ or ‘ERROR’. Therefore, by reading when ‘ERROR’
appears, a defective NPRS board can be identified. See Illustration 4–4.

In the test result example shown in Illustration 4–4, in Program 17, all the (four) tests passed. However, in Program
18, the fourth test failed (as shown by an arrow); this indicates that the #2 NPRS board is defective, since one NPRS
board has two DSPs, and a test is executed on each DSP. (This test example is for a recon system where two NPRS
boards are installed.)

If defective NPRS board can not be identified using this method, to the Phase 2 method discribed in next page.

Illustration 4–4 Test Result Example

Program17 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 17 1 mst sim 1 4 MemoryFill 00 A0000 20000 0 0 : PASS

PASS

PASS

PASS

Program18 : MemoryFill DSP : mst


Line List : 18 1 mst sim 1 4 MemoryFill 00 A0000 20000 ffffffff 0 : PASS

PASS (The first and second tests are executed on #1 NPRS,


and the third and fourth are on #2 NPRS.)

PASS

ERROR

DSP No : 0x0, ERR FLAG: 0x1


address0: 0x20A28000, rd_data0: 0xFFFFFF00, orgdata0: 0xFFFFFFFF
address1: 0x20A28001, rd_data1: 0xFFFFFF00, orgdata1: 0xFFFFFFFF
address2: 0x20A28002, rd_data2: 0xFFFFFF00, orgdata2: 0xFFFFFFFF
address3: 0x20A28003, rd_data3: 0xFFFFFF00, orgdata3: 0xFFFFFFFF
address4: 0x20A28004, rd_data4: 0xFFFFFF00, orgdata4: 0xFFFFFFFF

4–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)

How to Identify Defective NPRS – Phase 2


When a defective NPRS can not be identified, perform the following: Phase 2 method.

Table 4–2 lists a collection of the slave test programs checked for memories. The way to identify a defective NPRS
board, if any of these test programs failed, is explained in the following.

Table 4–2 Test Programs – Phase 2

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI Remarks


Program41 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 41 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 0 : PASS f f The
Slave
Program42 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 42 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f f checks
the me-
mories
Program43 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 43 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 1 : PASS f f (gm and
pm).
Program44 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 44 1 slv gm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f f
Program45 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 45 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 0 : PASS f f
Program46 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 46 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 0 : PASS f f
Program47 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 47 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 0 1 : PASS f f
Program48 : MemoryFill DSP : slv
Line List : 48 1 slv pm 1 16 MemoryFill 00 0 100000 ffffffff 2 : PASS f f

4–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)

Illustration 4–5 Editing Test

As shown in Illustration 4–5, click [DETAIL] in the Off Line Test menu. Then, the menu appears as shown in Illustration
4–6.

4–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND NPRS (continued)


Assume that the recon system has two NPRS boards, and that No. 41 test program failed.

Illustration 4–6 Test Edit Window

Select the test program


No. which failed, by
[PRIOR] or [NEXT].
(Sliding switch can be
used also to select the
test program.)

The number of DSPs equipped on NPRS boards. In


this example, the number is 4. (NPRS boards: 2,
and 2 DSPs per NPRS)
The test program starts from this DSP. In this
example, the test starts from #1 DSP.
(#1 DSP and #2 DSP are on #1 NPRS, and
#3 DSP and #4 DSP are on #2 NPRS.)

For example, by setting ‘Start Slv No’ to 3, and setting ‘Slv Count’ to 2, the program only tests the two DSPs on the
#2 NPRS board; the program does not test the #1 NPRS. Thus, by changing the ‘Start Slv No’ and ‘Slv Count’, a defec-
tive NPRS board can be identified.

4–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI

NPRM Diagnostics

Illustration 4–7 Running NPR – PCI Test

Select STOP,
QUICK, NPR,
PCI TEST,
and click RUN.

Table 4–3 shows an example of a test result display after clicking the [RUN] button.

Table 4–3 Test Result Display

Program1 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr


Line List : 1 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 0 clear : PASS

Program2 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr


Line List : 2 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 0 fill : PASS

Program3 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr


Line List : 3 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 1 incr : PASS

Program4 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr


Line List : 4 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff –1 decr : PASS

4–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI (continued)


Table 4–4 shows that, for each test program, a board (NPRIF, NPRM, NPRS, or DBPCI) which is considered to be
defective is indicated by ‘O’ if the test program failed.

As shown in this table, the NPRM board may be defective if any of the NPR – PCI test programs failed.

Table 4–4 NPR – PCI Test

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI Remarks


Program1 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 1 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 0 clear : PASS


f The
NPRIF
accesses
Program2 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 2 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff 0 fill : PASS


f the
memory
on the
Program3 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 3 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 0 1 incr : PASS


f NPRM.

Program4 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 4 1 MemoryFill 00 0 2000000 ffffffff –1 decr : PASS


f
Program5 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 5 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program6 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 6 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 0 1 1 : PASS


f
Program7 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 7 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 31 0 63 : PASS


f
Program8 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 8 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 0 2000000 31 1 64 : PASS


f
Program9 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 9 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program10 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 10 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 0 ffffffff 0 : PASS


f
Program11 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 11 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 0 0 1 : PASS


f
Program12 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 12 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 0 ffffffff –1 : PASS


f
Program13 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 13 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 1 0 0 : PASS


f

4–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI (continued)

Table 4–4 NPR – PCI Test (continued)

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI Remarks


Program14 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 14 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 2 0 0 : PASS


f The
NPRIF
accesses
Program15 : MemoryDMA Board : npr

Line List : 15 1 MemoryDMA 00 0 2000000 0 0 0 : PASS


f the
memory
on the
Program16 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 16 1 MemoryFill 00 9080000 40000 0 0 clear : PASS


f NPRM.

Program17 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 17 1 MemoryFill 00 9080000 40000 ffffffff 0 fill : PASS


f
Program18 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 18 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 9080000 40000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program19 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 19 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 9080000 40000 0 1 1 : PASS


f
Program20 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 20 1 MemoryFill 00 9300000 20000 0 0 clear : PASS


f
Program21 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 21 1 MemoryFill 00 9300000 20000 ffffffff 0 fill : PASS


f
Program22 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 22 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 9300000 20000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program23 : MemoryPIOre Board : npr

Line List : 23 1 MemoryBitWalk 00 9300000 20000 0 1 1 : PASS


f

4–13 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI (continued)

DBPCI Diagnostics

Illustration 4–8 Running DBPCI#0 – PCI Test

Select STOP,
QUICK, DBPCI#0,
PCI TEST, and
click RUN.

Table 4–5 shows an example of a test result display after clicking the [RUN] button.

Table 4–5 Test Result Display

Program1 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0


Line List : 1 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 0 0 clear : PASS

Program2 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0


Line List : 2 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 ffffffff 0 fill : PASS

Program3 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0


Line List : 3 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 0 1 incr : PASS

Program4 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0


Line List : 4 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 ffffffff –1 decr : PASS

4–14 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI (continued)


Table 4–6 shows that, for each test program, a board (NPRIF, NPRM, NPRS, or DBPCI) which is considered to be
defective is indicated by ‘O’ if the test program failed.

As shown in this table, the DBPCI board may be defective if any of the DBPCI#0 – PCI test programs failed.

Table 4–6 DBPCI#0 – PCI Test

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI


Program1 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 1 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 0 0 clear : PASS


f
Program2 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 2 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 ffffffff 0 fill : PASS


f
Program3 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 3 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 0 1 incr : PASS


f
Program4 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 4 1 MemoryFill 10 0 400000 ffffffff –1 decr : PASS


f
Program5 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 5 1 MemoryBitWalk 10 0 400000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program6 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 6 1 MemoryBitWalk 10 0 400000 0 1 1 : PASS


f
Program7 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 7 1 MemoryBitWalk 10 0 400000 31 0 63 : PASS


f
Program8 : MemoryPIOdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 8 1 MemoryBitWalk 10 0 400000 31 1 64 : PASS


f
Program9 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 9 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program10 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 10 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 0 ffffffff 0 : PASS


f
Program11 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 11 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 0 0 1 : PASS


f
Program12 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 12 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 0 ffffffff –1 : PASS


f
Program13 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 13 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 1 0 0 : PASS


f

4–15 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 DIAGNOSTICS FOR NPRM AND DBPCI (continued)

Table 4–6 DBPCI#0 – PCI Test (continued)

NPRIF NPRM NPRS DBPCI


Program14 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 14 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 2 0 0 : PASS


f
Program15 : MemoryDMA Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 15 1 MemoryDMA 10 0 400000 0 0 0 : PASS


f
Program16 : RegTestdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 16 1 RegTest 10 0 /usr/g/diag/data/bitwalk.dat 3fffffc 0 0 : PASS


f
Program17 : RegTestdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 17 1 RegTest 10 4 /usr/g/diag/data/bitwalk.dat 3fffffc 0 0 : PASS


f
Program18 : RegTestdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 18 1 RegTest 10 8 /usr/g/diag/data/bitwalk.dat 3fffffc 0 0 : PASS


f
Program19 : RegTestdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 19 1 RegTest 10 10 /usr/g/diag/data/bitwalk.dat 3fffffc 0 0 : PASS


f
Program20 : RegTestdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 20 1 RegTest 10 14 /usr/g/diag/data/bitwalk.dat 3fffffc 0 0 : PASS


f
Program21 : RegTestdb Board : dbpci#0

Line List : 21 1 RegTest 10 20 /usr/g/diag/data/onoff.dat 1 0 0 : PASS


f

4–16 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-4 AUTO POST RECON TEST


If no error occurs in the power–up test or in Off Line Test described in Section 4-2 or 4-3, perform this Auto Post Recon
Test.

Select [Service] → [Diagnostics & analysis] → [Auto Post Recon Test], to display the Auto Post Recon Test menu.

Illustration 4–9 Auto Post Recon Test Menu

Click [Select Image ID], and [Image


Browser], to display the image browser.
In the image browser, select an image to
be test–reconstructed, and then, click
Accept.
The image should have been recon-
structed by the STND mode.

Enter 1000. The recon operation


will be repeated 1000 times.

The recon test will be continued until


an error occurs this setting times (or
until the number of tests reaches the
‘No. of Test’ setting).

After setting the parameters above, click OK (displayed below the above menu screen), and then, the Scan & Recon
Parameters check display as in Illustration 4–10 appears.

4–17 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-4 AUTO POST RECON TEST (continued)

Illustration 4–10 Recon Mode Check

Check that the ‘Recon


Mode’ is STND, other-
wise, select an other
image whose recon
mode is STND, since an
error will occur depending
on the parameters such
are STND+, Shoulder Arti
= On, DFOV values.

After checking the parameters above, click Confirm (displayed below the above check screen), and then, the recon
test is executed and the result is displayed as in Illustration 4–11.

4–18 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-4 AUTO POST RECON TEST (continued)

Illustration 4–11 Test Result Display

Each time if an error occurs,


this number increases by 1.

Error image information


is displayed.

If an error occurs in this recon test, the recon system is considered to be defective. In this case, however, since this
recon test can not identify which unit is defective, you will have to execute the Off Line Test described in Section 4-2
or 4-3 again.

If you can not identify a defective unit with the Off Line Test, you may have to troubleshoot other cause than the recon
system. Check the raw data, for example.

4–19 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

4–20 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

TABLE/GANTRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

SECTION 2 – POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 TGP BOARD POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-1 Gantry Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-1-2 Table Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-1-3 Management Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2 OGP BOARD POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5

SECTION 3 – OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 TGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 Gantry Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-2 Table Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-1-3 Management Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6

SECTION 4 – ERROR MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 ERROR MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) .
4–3
4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) 4–18
4-4 ERRORS DETECTED BY OGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35
4-5 ERRORS DETECTED BY DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48

i TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

ii TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

SECTION 1 – LED DESCRIPTION

Table 1–1 DTRF or DTRF2 LED Description

LED Description
(B)CONERR Lights when an FPGA Configuration error occurs.
(B)DSON Lights when ‘_DSON’ is active.
(B)DSIN Lights when ‘_DSIN’ is active.
+5V Lights while +5 VDC is supplied.
(B)DXFER Lights when ‘DXFER’ is active.
ACK Lights when ‘ACK’ is active. (DTRF and 2233745 DTRF2)
Always OFF. (2233745–2 DTRF2)
(B)CSTRB Lights when a Taxi command (START, ENDOK, or ENDNG) is
issued.
(B)FECERR Lights when an FEC encode error occurs.

1–1 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–2 TGP LED Description

LED Description
CHANGE Lights when adjustment data is not stored during the gantry or table adjust-
ment.
SVALM Lights when the servo amplifier (for gantry rotation) is in an alarm state. The
type of the alarm is indicated on the LED on the amplifier; or, lights also when
AC 200 V power is not supplied to the amplifier.
ERRM Lights when detecting an error concerning processor communication or scan
operations. Goes off when the TGP board is powered off or reset.
ERRG Lights when detecting an error concerning gantry rotation operations. Goes off
when the TGP board is powered off or reset.
ERRT Lights when detecting an error concerning table or tilt operations. Goes off
when the TGP board is powered off or reset.
XGRAY Lights when the safety loop is closed on the TGP board, which indicates that
the TGP board grants the power supply to the x–ray generator.
LPM Blinks in a one–second cycle, indicating the interval timer operation for commu-
nication and scan operations.
RQM Lights when the TGP board receives commands from the operator console and
is executing them.
MNM (Not used)
GSF Lights when the rotation safety switches for gantry covers are set and the TGP
board grants gantry rotation.
LPG Blinks in a one–second cycle, indicating the interval timer operation for gantry
rotation operations.
RQG Lights when the TGP board receives commands on gantry rotation from the
operator console and is executing them.
TRG Indicates trigger pulses sent to the OGP board.
LPT Blinks in a one–second cycle, indicating the interval timer operation for table
and gantry tilt operations.
RQT Lights when the TGP board receives commands on table or gantry tilt opera-
tions from the operator console and is executing them.
MNT Lights when the table or gantry (tilt) is operated by the gantry panel switches.

1–2 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–3 OGP LED Description

LED Description
DS1 (TEST) Lights when an error occurs.
DS2 (RINGS) MP–SP communication error.
(MP: Management Processor on TGP board; SP: Scan Processor on OGP
board)
DS3 (DENTG) DENTG monitor.
DS4 (EXPCMD) EXPCMD monitor.
DS5(REQS) Lights during a task request.
DS6 (LOOPS) Blinks at intervals of 0.5 sec.
DS7 (ERRS) Lights when an error occurs.

See also the following table showing which LED’s light when an error occurs.

Table 1–4 Error and LED on OGP Board

Error LED
(The following LED’s light when the error written
to the left occurs)
RAM check error ERRS, LOOPS
ROM check error ERRS
Hang up (detected by the watchdog timer) ERRS, LOOPS, REQS, RINGS, TEST
Hardware error while OGP receives data ERRS, RINGS
ACK, NACK timeout ERRS, RINGS
NACK detected for three times ERRS
NACK transmitted ERRS
Aperture error ERRS
OGP event error ERRS
Scan error ERRS
XG processor communication error ERRS
The ERRS LED goes off when the x–ray tube rotor starts to rotate.
The RINGS LED will not go off until the OGP board is reset.

1–3 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–5 RF XMT LED Description

LED Description
LED1 Lights while power is supplied.
The light color becomes red, when the RF XMT is not receiving data from the
DTRF board.
The light color becomes green, when the RF XMT is receiving data from the
DTRF board (where, data is either das data during scans or sync pattern data
during standby).

Illustration 1–1 RF XMT

LED1

Table 1–6 XMT LED Description

LED Description
POWER Lights while power is supplied.
(green)
SIGNAL Lights when data is prerent. (Transitin detector)

Illustration 1–2 XMT

SIGNAL POWER

TRANSMITTER

1–4 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–7 RF RCV LED Description

LED Description
Power LED Lights (in green) while power is supplied to the RF shoe.
(Power is supplied from the RF RCV to the RF shoe via a coaxial cable. The LED does not
light if the cable is not correctly connected to the RF shoe, or if power is not supplied to the
RF RCV itself.)
AGC Center LED Lights (in green) when the level of the RF output power from the RF shoe is in the middle
within the proper range.
RF Output LEDs These LEDs are the indicator for the RF output power from the RF shoe.
D Any one of the ten LEDs lights, normally according to gantry rotation.
D LED colors:
Right and left ends: red
Middle two: green
Others: yellow
D When any LED on ‘Normal’ positions lights, it indicates that the RF output power is normal.
D When any LED on ‘Service’ positions lights, it indicates that the RF output power is too
weak or too strong.
(In this case, inspect the RF shoe positioning, the power supply for the rotational gantry,
or RF slip ring parts on the rotative side, etc.)

Illustration 1–3 RF RCV

Power LED
AGC Center LED

Power
Low High

RF Output LEDs

Service Normal Service

1–5 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–8 RCV LED Description

LED Description
POWER Lights while power is supplied.
(green)
SIGNAL Lights when data is prerent. (Transitin detector)

Illustration 1–4 RCV

SIGNAL POWER

RECEIVER

1–6 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–9 TEMP CONT LED Description

LED Description
±0.5° C Lights when the detector temperature is now ±0.5° C from the set temperature.
(LED1)
±2.0° C Lights when the detector temperature is now ±2.0° C from the set temperature.
(LED2)
HIGH ERR Lights when the detector temperature exceeds 40° C (error).
(LED3)
LOW ERR Lights when the thermistor is not connected.
(LED4)
SET ERR Lights when the set temperature is not normal in the variable set temperature
(LED5) mode.

HEATER Lights when the heater is turned on.


(LED6)
LOOP Normally blinks. Goes off when the microprocessor is hung–up.
(LED7)

Illustration 1–5 TEMP CONT

±0.5° C
LED1
CN1
±2.0° C
LED2
HIGH ERR
LED3
CN2
LOW ERR
LED4

SET ERR
LED5
HEATER
7 LEDs LED6
LOOP
LED7

1–7 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–10 Servo Amp LED Description

7–segment LED Description


– Servo Off
0 Servo On
1 Overcurrent
2 Overload
3 Overspeed
5 Abnormal driver temperature
6 Abnormal encoder
7 Abnormal driving power
9 Abnormal EEPROM

Illustration 1–6 Servo Amp

7–segment LED

CN1 CN2
CN3

TB2

1–8 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 10 2202119

Table 1–11 Step Motor Driver LED Description

LED Description
Power LED Lights while power is supplied.

Illustration 1–7 Step Motor Driver

CN3 CN2 CN1

Power LED

Table 1–12 IMS Motor Driver LED Description

LED Description
Ready (green) Lights when servo operation is enabled.
Alarm (red) Lights in an alarm state.

Illustration 1–8 IMS Motor Driver

READY LED

CN5 ALARM LED

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

1–9 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

1–10 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 1 2202119

SECTION 2 – POWER–ON TEST

2-1 TGP BOARD POWER–ON TEST


The TGP board includes the following three microprocessors.

Processor Main Function


Gantry Processor Controls gantry rotation.
Table Processor Controls table and cradle operations and gantry tilt operation.
Controls the gantry display, and interfaces the gantry panel
switches.
Management Processor Communicates with the operator console and the OGP board
on the gantry rotative frame.
Controls the IMS (Intermediate Support).

After powering on or resetting the TGP board, each processor performs ROM based power–on tests in parallel, as
described in Table 2–1.

Table 2–1 TGP Power–on Test

Gantry Processor Table Processor Management Processor


RAM Check RAM Check RAM Check
↓ ↓ ↓
ROM Check ROM Check ROM Check
↓ ↓
Gantry Rotation Check and Azimuth Gantry Display and Switch LED –
Counter Initialization Check

– Gantry Tilt and Table Up/down Relay –
Check
(See Section 2-1-1 for details.) (See Section 2-1-2 for details.) (See Section 2-1-3 for details.)

2–1 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 1 2202119

2-1-1 Gantry Processor

RAM Check
1. The gantry processor (U87) performs read/write checks of its internal RAM, the external RAM (U92), and the
dual port RAM (U77).

2. If a RAM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRG, LPG, RQG LED’s lighting
on the TGP board.

If no error occurs, the processor proceeds to the following step.

ROM Check
3. The processor performs a data sum check on addresses 0 ∼ BFFF of the external ROM (U112).

4. If a ROM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRG, LPG, RQG LED’s lighting.

If no error occurs, the LPG LED blinks, and the processor proceeds to the following step.

Gantry Rotation Check and Azimuth Counter Initialization


5. The gantry processor starts rotating the gantry to check that the operation can be normally performed.

a. If the SYS–OFF–MNL service switch (SW1) on the TGP board is set to OFF, the system waits until the switch
is set to SYS or MNL, with the RQG and LPG LED’s alternately blinking.

b. If power is not supplied to the servo amplifier, the rotation check is terminated, with the ERRG LED lighting.

If any other abnormal conditions/operations are found, the rotation check is terminated.

To start the rotation check anew, resolve the problems, and power on or reset the TGP board.

6. The gantry rotates at 15 sec/Rev, and the processor initializes the gantry azimuth counter with the GPLS1 signal.

a. If the initialization of the counter is not performed within 25 sec, the rotation is terminated, with the ERRG LED
lighting.

2–2 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 1 2202119

2-1-2 Table Processor

RAM Check
1. The table processor (U42) performs read/write checks of its internal RAM, the external RAM (U64), and the dual
port RAM (U48).

2. If a RAM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRT, LPT, RQT, MNT LED’s
lighting on the TGP board.

If no error occurs, the processor proceeds to the following step.

ROM Check
3. The processor performs a data sum check on addresses 0 ∼ DFFF of the external ROM (U68).

4. If a ROM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRT, RQT, MNT LED’s lighting.

If no error occurs, the LPT LED blinks, and the processor proceeds to the following step.

Gantry Display and Switch LED Check


5. The processor sequentially displays test characters (numbers) on the gantry display, and at the same time, se-
quentially lights gantry panel switch LED’s.
Refer to the Rotational Operation section of Gantry, of the Functional Check / Adjustment manual.

Gantry Tilt and Table Up/down Relay Check


The gantry tilt or table up/down operation is performed by a pump/valve mechanism which is powered by AC 115 V.
This power is conveyed through two relays connected in series on SUB BD. Refer to Illustration 2–1. With these
connections, if one relay of the two failed (that is, always closed), the power flow can be cut off by the other relay.
This check verifies these relay operations.

6. The processor closes one relay which is controlled by the enable lines, and verifies that the gantry tilt or table
up/down does not take place.

If the operation takes place, the other relay (direct) is considered to be failed (closed), since any key on the gantry
switch panel is not pressed while the relay (enable) is activated; and an error message is displayed on the opera-
tor console (OC).

7. An LED blinks on the gantry switch panel, and then press the key with the LED blinking.

If the corresponding operation takes place, the other relay (enable) is considered to be failed (closed), since the
processor does not activate the relay (enable) while the key is pressed; and an error message is displayed on
the OC.

2–3 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 1 2202119

2-1-2 Table Processor (continued)

Illustration 2–1 Safety by Double Relays

SUB Board
AC 115 V Gantry Tilt or
Table Up/Down

Direct Enable

Gantry
Panel
Switch Table
Processor

TGP Board

2-1-3 Management Processor

RAM Check
1. The management processor (U88) performs read/write checks of its internal RAM, the external RAM (U62), and
the dual port RAM (U48, U77).

2. If a RAM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with one of ERRM, LPM, RQM, MNM
LED’s lighting on the TGP board.

If no error occurs, the processor proceeds to the following step.

ROM Check
3. The processor performs a data sum check on addresses 0 ∼ BFFF of the external ROM (U111).

4. If a ROM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRM, RQM, MNM LED’s light-
ing.

If no error occurs, the LPM LED blinks.

2–4 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 1 2202119

2-2 OGP BOARD POWER–ON TEST


The OGP board is equipped on the gantry rotative frame and includes a microprocessor called Scan Processor, and
mainly performs the following controls in scan sequence, according to commands from the Management processor
on the TGP board.

D Scan control

D DAS control

D X–ray generator (JEDI) control

D Aperture control

D Positioning light control

After powering on or resetting the OGP board, the scan processor performs ROM based power–on tests (RAM check
→ ROM check), as described below.

RAM Check
1. The scan processor performs read/write checks of the external RAM and its internal RAM.

2. If a RAM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRS, LOOPS LED’s lighting
on the OGP board.

If no error occurs, the processor proceeds to the following step.

ROM Check
3. The processor performs a data sum check of the external ROM.

4. If a ROM check error occurs, the processor will stay in a hang up state, with the ERRS LED lighting.

If no error occurs, the LOOPS LED blinks.

2–5 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
blank 2202119

2–6 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 12 2202119

SECTION 3 – OFF–LINE TEST

3-1 TGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST


Each of the TGP board processors (Gantry processor, Table processor, and Management processor) has its own
off–line tests. These off–line tests are mainly used for adjustments or checks of the gantry or table subsystems.

1. To perform the off–line tests, set one of the following dip switch to ON for the corresponding processor. Refer
to the Gantry/Table section of Switch/Jumper Setting of Boards/Devices, of the Functional Check / Adjustment
manual.

Dip Switch Processor


G6 Gantry Processor
T6 Table Processor
M6 Management Processor

CAUTION
Do not perform off–line tests of two or three processors simultaneously.

2. Each off–line test consists of test programs as described in Table 3–1. The test program Nos. are displayed on
the gantry Height display. Press the TEST1 switch on the TGP board to select a test program, as the test program
No. increases every time the switch is pressed.
Test program Nos. other than described in Table 3–1 are not defined or should not be used.
On the Position display, data is displayed according to each test.

3. To restore the normal operations of the processors, set the corresponding dip switch to OFF.

Table 3–1 TGP Off–line Test

Test Program No.


Gantry Processor Table Processor Management Processor
400, 401 000 ∼ 013 700
014 ∼ 020
022 ∼ 024
035 ∼ 037
(See Section 3-1-1 for (See Section 3-1-2 for (See Section 3-1-3 for
each test program.) each test program.) each test program.)

3–1 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 12 2202119

3-1-1 Gantry Processor

Table 3–2 Gantry Processor Off–line Tests

Test Program No. Description


400 Displays gantry azimuth in 0.1 deg. The x–ray tube home position (at 12 o’clock posi-
tion) is defined as 180 deg., i.e., 1800.
This test is used when ‘gantry rotation velocity offset’ is adjusted.
401 Displays gantry rotation speed in 1 msec/Rev.
Used when ‘gantry rotation speed’ is adjusted.

3–2 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 12 2202119

3-1-2 Table Processor

Table 3–3 Table Processor Off–line Tests (No. 000 ∼ 013)

Test Program No. Description


000 Used when FWD 30 deg. tilt angle is adjusted.
001 Used when BWD 30 deg. tilt angle is adjusted.
002 Displays output values of the analog–to–digital converter for the tilt angle potentiome-
ter.
By pressing the Range key, displays the tilt angle in 0.1 deg. The FWD 30.5 deg. posi-
tion is defined as 0.
003 Used when the cradle Out limit position is adjusted.
004 Used when the cradle In limit position is adjusted.
005 Displays output values of the analog–to–digital converter for the cradle position poten-
tiometer.
By pressing the Range key, displays the cradle position in 0.5 mm. The Out mechani-
cal limit position is defined as 0.
006 Used when the IMS (Intermediate Support) Out limit position is adjusted.
007 Used when the IMS In limit position is adjusted.
008 Displays output values of the analog–to–digital converter for the IMS position poten-
tiometer.
By pressing the Range key, displays the IMS position in 0.5 mm. The Out mechanical
limit position is defined as 0.
009 Used when the table Down limit position is adjusted.
010 Used when the table Up limit position is adjusted.
011 Displays output values of the analog–to–digital converter for the table height position
potentiometer.
By pressing the Range key, displays the table height position in 0.5 mm. The Down
mechanical limit position is defined as 1.
012 Used when ‘cradle compensation’ is adjusted.
013 (For TGP board of 2284399–*, or, 2156510–5 or later only)
Used when compensating the incorrect interlock operation of table up/down and gantry
tilt due to the incorrect height alignment of the gantry and table.

3–3 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 12 2202119

3-1-2 Table Processor (continued)

Table 3–4 Table Processor Off–line Tests (No. 014 ∼ 021)

Test Program No. Description


014 Sets the cradle travel speed to 2 ∼ 150 mm/sec in increments of 2 mm/sec.
Cradle Drive: Half–step drive.
Operation: Press the In and Fast keys simultaneously to set faster speeds; or press
the Out and Fast keys simultaneously to set slower speeds.
Press the In or Out key to move the cradle in the In or Out direction.
015 Sets the cradle travel speed to 2 ∼ 44 mm/sec in increments of 2 mm/sec.
Cradle Drive: Micro–step drive.
Operation: Same as for Test Program No. 014.
016 Sets the cradle travel speed to 0.715 ∼ 42.86 mm/sec in increments of 0.715 mm/sec
for helical scans (Scan Time: 0.7 sec).
Cradle Drive, Operation: Same as for Test Program No. 015.
017 Sets the cradle travel speed to 0.625 ∼ 37.5 mm/sec in increments of 0.625 mm/sec
for helical scans (Scan Time: 0.8 sec).
Cradle Drive, Operation: Same as for Test Program No. 015.
018 Sets the cradle travel speed to 0.5 ∼ 30 mm/sec in increments of 0.5 mm/sec for heli-
cal scans (Scan Time: 1 sec).
Cradle Drive, Operation: Same as for Test Program No. 015.
019 Sets the cradle travel speed to 0.33 ∼ 20 mm/sec in increments of 0.33 mm/sec for
helical scans (Scan Time: 1.5 sec).
Cradle Drive, Operation: Same as for Test Program No. 015.
020 Sets the cradle travel speed to 0.25 ∼ 15 mm/sec in increments of 0.25 mm/sec for
helical scans (Scan Time: 2 sec).
Cradle Drive, Operation: Same as for Test Program No. 015.
021 Not defined.

3–4 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 12 2202119

3-1-2 Table Processor (continued)

Table 3–5 Table Processor Off–line Tests (No. 022 ∼ 037)

Test Program No. Description


022 Displays counts of the cradle position encoder pulses while the gantry rotates from the
home position to the home position during helical scans (Helical interval check). (1
pulse: 0.1 mm)
023 Displays outputs of the up/down counter for the cradle position encoder pulses. (1
pulse: 0.1 mm)
024 Displays outputs of the up/down counter for the IMS (Intermediate Support) position
encoder pulses. (1 pulse: 0.1 mm)
025 ∼ 034 Not defined.
035 (For TGP board of 2284399–*, or, 2156510–5 or later only)
Used when setting the lowest table height allowed.
036 (For TGP board of 2284399–*, or, 2156510–5 or later only)
Used when setting the most extended cradle In–position allowed.
037 (For TGP board of 2284399–*, or, 2156510–6 or later only)
Used when adjusting the cradle position control according to the positioning light posi-
tion.

3–5 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 12 2202119

3-1-3 Management Processor

Table 3–6 Management Processor Off–line Test

Test Program No. Description


700 Displays operation status of the management processor while the processor receives
commands from the operator console and is executing them; as defined below:
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
0 Com. Tilt Cradle Gantry Apt XG Scan
req. mode mode mode mode mode mode
The above is displayed as a tetra–number (increases like 0, 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 21, ...).
Example: If Gantry Mode, Aperture Mode, and XG Mode are requested, the following
will be displayed:
Height: 700 Pos.: 0032

3–6 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

SECTION 4 – ERROR MESSAGE

4-1 ERROR MESSAGE


The errors described in Table 4–1 through 4–53 are detected by the TGP, OGP, or CIF board. When an error occurs,
the error information is sent to the operator console (OC) using the Status communication.

Error with no Error Message


If either of the following errors occur, the microprocessor on the TGP or OGP board are forced to run in an infinite
loop, and no error message is sent to the OC.

D RAM, ROM check error:


These checks are performed during a power–up sequence.

D Processor hang up:


This is detected by the watchdog timer at intervals of 10.9 msec.

4–1 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-1 ERROR MESSAGE (continued)

Error Class
The errors detected by the TGP, OGP, or CIF board are either classified as Error Class, or Information Class, accord-
ing to below:

D Error:
If an error of this ‘Error’ class occurs during a scan, the scan is aborted, and an error message is displayed
on the OC monitor.

D Information (written as ‘Infor.’ in Table 4–1 ∼ 4–53):


If an error of this ‘Information’ class occurs during a scan, the scan will be continued, and an error message
is not displayed on the OC monitor.

Communication via Slip Rings (RS422)


The scan processor on the OGP board communicates with the management processor on the TGP board via slip
rings.
Normally, when one of the two processors receives communication data from the other processor, the receiving proc-
essor checks a checksum data, and sends back an ACK message to the sender, if the data is OK; otherwise, sends
back a NACK message. When the sender receives this NACK message, it resends the data. If this repeats three
times (three NACK’s), the communication is regarded as an error. If the receiver does not send ACK nor NACK within
a specified time, this also is regarded as an error communication.

4–2 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5)
Note
For systems with system software version 6 or later, see Section 4-3, Errors Detected by TGP Board
(for System Version 5.5 or Later).

Table 4–1 Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
0D 11–1001–0D Interlock X–ray. Error TGP received SCAN CMD while relay(RL1) in 1. Other equipment connected with relay(RL1)
Gantry Rear Switch Box is energized. is unexpectedly active(H).; 2. Cable connec-
tion between RL1 and other equipment(M).

Table 4–2 Helical Scan Error


Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU
Code
11 12–1001–11 Cradle Out of Limit. Error Cradle position out of limit on Helical SCAN 1. Cradle Potentiometer; 2. IMS potentiometer
(TP) CMD.
12 12–1001–12 Cradle Unlatch. (TP) Error Cradle unlatch was detected on Helical SCAN 1. Accidental push on Latch Switch.; 2. Cab-
CMD. ling between Latch Switch and TGP including
TBLCON BD and TBL BD.
13 12–1001–13 Cradle Slip. (TP) Error Cradle slip was detected during Helical Scan. 1. Patient movement during Helical Scan or
some obstacles on bottom of cradle or cradle
roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
14 10–0001–14 Undefined Infor. – –
15 12–1001–15 Cradle Start Position Error Cradle start position is out of specification on Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Error. (TP) Helical Scan. Motor
16 12–1001–16 Interval Position Error. Error Cradle Interval is out of specification on Helical 1. Patient movement during Helical Scan or
(TP) Scan. some obstacles on bottom of cradle or cradle
roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder

(continued)

4–3 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–2 Helical Scan Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
17 12–1001–17 Cradle Move Time Error Cradle acceleration/deceleration time out. Or 1. Patient movement at the beginning of Heli-
Out. (TP) total cradle movement time out on Helical cal Scan.; 2. Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or
Scan. Cradle Stepping Motor
18 12–1001–18 OC Command Error. Error TGP(MP) received unspecified Helical SCAN Take a best guess and good luck.
(TP) CMD from OC.
19 11–1001–19 SCINITREQ Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive SCINTREQ from Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Out. (MP) TGP(TP) on Helical Scan. Motor
1A 11–1001–1A OGP Com Not Ready Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
in 1 sec. (MP) 1sec during Helical SCAN CMD.
1B 11–1001–1B TP Com Not Ready in Error Communication with TGP(TP) is not ready af- TGP
1 sec. (MP) ter 1sec during Helical SCAN CMD.
1C 10–0001–1C Undefined Infor. – –
1D 10–0001–1D Undefined Infor. – –
1E 10–0001–1E Undefined Infor. – –
1F 12–1001–1F Cradle Potentio Error. Error Unexpected input from Cradle Potentiometer Cradle Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
(TP) during Helical Scan. and Cradle Potentiometer.

4–4 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–3 Scout Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
41 12–1001–41 Cradle Out of Limit. Error Cradle position out of limit on Scout SCAN 1. Cradle Potentiometer; 2. IMS potentiometer
(TP) CMD.
42 12–1001–42 Cradle Unlatch. (TP) Error Cradle unlatch was detected on Scout SCAN 1. Accidental push on Latch Switch.; 2. Cab-
CMD. ling between Latch Switch and TGP including
TBLCON BD and TBL BD.
43 12–1001–43 Cradle Slip. (TP) Error Cradle slip was detected during Scout Scan. 1. Patient movement during Scout Scan or
some obstacles on bottom of cradle or cradle
roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
44 10–0001–44 Undefined Infor. – –
45 12–1001–45 Cradle Start Position Error Cradle start position is out of specification on Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Error. (TP) Scout Scan. Motor
46 10–0001–46 Undefined Infor. – –
47 12–1001–47 Cradle Move Time Error Cradle acceleration/deceleration time out. Or Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Out. (TP) total cradle movement time out on Scout Scan. Motor
48 10–0001–48 Undefined Infor. – –
49 11–1001–49 SCINITREQ Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive SCINTREQ from TGP
Out. (MP) TGP(TP) on Scout Scan.
4A 11–1001–4A OGP Com Not Ready Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
in 1 sec. (MP) 1sec during Scout SCAN CMD.
4B 11–1001–4B TP Com Not Ready in Error Communication with TP is not ready after 1sec TGP
1 sec. (MP) during Scout SCAN CMD.
4C 11–1001–4C Offset Scan Time Out. Error TGP did not receive OFFSET END from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
(MP) on Scout Scan. Slip Ring.

(continued)

4–5 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–3 Scout Scan Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
4D 10–0001–4D Undefined Infor. – –
4E 11–1001–4E Scout Scan Time Out. Error TGP did not receive SCAN END from OGP on OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
(MP) Scout Scan. Slip Ring.
4F 12–1001–4F Cradle Potentio Error. Error Unexpected input from Cradle Potentiometer Cradle Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
(TP) during Scout Scan. and Cradle Potentiometer.

4–6 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–4 Fluoro Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
51 10–0001–51 Undefined Infor. – –
52 10–0001–52 Undefined Infor. – –
53 10–0001–53 Undefined Infor. – –
54 10–0001–54 Undefined Infor. – –
55 10–0001–55 Undefined Infor. – –
56 10–0001–56 Undefined Infor. – –
57 10–0001–57 Undefined Infor. – –
58 11–1001–58 XRAY–on timeout. Error mA/kV status was not received from OGP in JEDI(kV control or CT–IF), or interface be-
(MP) response to Fluoro SCAN CMD. tween JEDI and OGP.
59 11–1001–59 XRAY–off timeout. Error mA/kV status from OGP did not stop when JEDI(kV control)
(MP) X–ray Foot SW is off during Fluoro Scan.
5A 11–1001–5A OGP Com is not Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
ready in 1sec. (MP) 1sec during Fluoro SCAN CMD.
5B 10–0001–5B Undefined Infor. – –
5C 11–1001–5C Fluoro scan command Error Fluoro SCAN CMD is received from OC when NFIX or TGP/NFIX interface
in normal mode. (MP) NFIX is not in Fluoro mode.
5D 11–1001–5D X–SW is not on for Error Fluoro SCAN CMD is received from OC after NFIX or Cabling between TGP and NFIX
1sec before scan X–ray Foot SW is off.
command. (MP)
5E 11–1001–5E Scan command has Error Fluoro SCAN CMD is received while Gantry Take a best guess and good luck.
come while GNTRY button is pushed.
button is pushed .
(MP)
5F 10–0001–5F Undefined Infor. – –

4–7 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–5 Gantry Req Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 13–1002–01 Gantry Request Com- Error Unspecified GNTRY CMD was received from Mismatched version between TGP firmware
mand Error. (GP) OC. and OC software.
2 13–1002–02 Gantry Set Time Out Error Gantry position or rotation speed is not ready 1. Servo Amp; 2. Axial Motor
in 20 sec. (GP) in 20sec after GNTRY CMD from OC.
3 13–1002–03 Axial Motor Over Error Axial Motor over heat is detected. 1. Axial Motor; 2. SUB BD
Heat. (GP)
4 13–1002–04 Servo Amp Alarm. Error Servo Amp alarm is detected. 1. Too many acceleration/deceleration in short
(GP) duration.; 2. Servo Amp; 3. Axial Motor
5 13–1002–05 Gantry Not System Error Switch of TGP is not set as system mode. Switch of TGP is not set as system mode.
Mode. (GP)
6 13–1002–06 Gantry Rotate Not Error No feedback from Axial motor encoder was 1. Service Switch on SUB BD is set.; 2. 24V
Response. (GP) detected after Gantry rotation request. Power Supply; 3. Servo Amp; 4. Axial Motor;
5. Cabling between Axial Motor and TGP
7 13–1002–07 Gantry Rotate Over Error Gantry rotation speed is over specification. 1. Rotation Speed Adjustment; 2. Servo Amp;
Speed. (GP) 3. TGP
8 13–1002–08 Gantry Rotate Under Error Gantry rotation speed is under specification. 1. Rotation Speed Adjustment; 2. Servo Amp;
Speed. (GP) 3. TGP
9 13–1002–09 Cover Safty SW Error Gantry Cover Switch is open and Axial Motor 1. Alignment between Gantry cover and
Open. (GP) is not powered. Gantry Cover Switch; 2. Gantry Cover Switch
and its cabling to TGP
A 13–1002–0A Dynamic Break On. Error GNTRY CMD was received while Axial Motor Take a best guess and good luck.
(GP) dynamic break working.
B 13–1002–0B Gantry Init Error or Error Gantry was not initialized correctly. Or azi- 1. G–Pulse1(M); 2. TGP; 3. Cabling between
Position Error. (GP) muth counter on TGP is overflow. G–Pulse1 and TGP

(continued)

4–8 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–5 Gantry Req Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
C 10–0002–0C Undefined Infor. – –
D 10–0002–0D Undefined Infor. – –
E 11–1002–0E Gantry 130sec(180s Error Gantry continues to rotate over 130sec without 1. Cabling between TGP and OC; 2. OC could
at Smartview) timer is GNTRY CMD nor SCAN CMD from OC. not send GNTRY CMD nor SCAN CMD to
timeout on TGP. (MP) TGP.
F 11–1002–0F Gantry init timeout Error TGP did not receive reply from OGP in re- 1. G–Pulse2; 2. OGP or TGP/OGP interface
ack=100ms rdy=7sec. sponse to Gantry initialize request. which includes Slip Ring.
(MP)

4–9 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–6 Gantry Req Error Code2

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 13–1002–11 Over Current. Over Current Error was detected on Servo 1. Servo AMP; 2. Axial Motor
Amp.
2 13–1002–12 Over Load. Over Load Error was detected on Servo Amp. 1. Gantry acceleration/deceleration too fre-
quent.; 2. Servo AMP; 3. Axial Motor
3 13–1002–13 Over Speed. Over Speed Error was detected on Servo Servo AMP
Amp.
4 10–0002–14 Undefined Infor. – –
5 13–1002–15 Abnormal Servo Amp Servo Amp. Temperature is out of specifica- Servo AMP
Temparature. tion.
6 13–1002–16 Abnormal Encorder Output from Axial Motor Encoder is out of 1. Axial Motor; 2. Servo Amp
specification.
7 13–1002–17 Abnormal Driving Driving Power of Servo Amp is out of specifi- 1. Servo AMP; 2. Axial Motor
Power. cation.
8 10–0002–18 Undefined Infor. – –
9 13–1002–19 Abnormal EEPROM. Abnormal EEPROM error was detected on 1. Servo AMP
Servo Amp.
A 10–0002–1A Undefined Infor. – –
B 10–0002–1B Undefined Infor. – –
C 10–0002–1C Undefined Infor. – –
D 10–0002–1D Undefined Infor. – –
E 10–0002–1E Undefined Infor. – –
F 10–0002–1F Undefined Infor. – –

4–10 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–7 Cradle Req Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 12–1030–01 Cradle Out of Limit. Cradle position out of limit on CRADLE CMD. 1. Cradle Potentiometer; 2. IMS Potentiometer
2 12–1030–02 Cradle Unlatch. Cradle unlatch was detected on CRADLE 1. Accidental push on Latch Switch.; 2. Cab-
CMD. ling between Latch Switch and TGP including
TBLCON BD and TBL BD.
3 12–1003–03 Cradle Slip. Cradle slip was detected in response to 1. Patient movement during cradle movement
CRADLE CMD. or some obstacles on bottom of cradle or
cradle roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
4 10–0003–04 Undefined Infor. – –
5 12–1003–05 Out of Scannable Scannable range is zero because table posi- 1. Table position is too low. Raise table to
Range. tion is too low. higher position.; 2. Table Height Potentiometer
6 10–0003–06 Undefined Infor. – –
7 12–1003–07 Cradle Move Time Cradle acceleration/deceleration time out. Or Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Out. total cradle movement time out in response to Motor
CRADLE CMD.
8 10–0003–08 Undefined Infor. – –
9 10–0003–09 Undefined Infor. – –
A 10–0003–0A Undefined Infor. – –
B 10–0003–0B Undefined Infor. – –
C 10–0003–0C Undefined Infor. – –
D 10–0003–0D Undefined Infor. – –
E 10–0003–0E Undefined Infor. – –
F 12–1003–0F Cradle Potentio Error. Unexpected input from Cradle Potentiometer Cradle Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
in response to CRADLE CMD. and Cradle Potentiometer.

4–11 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–8 Tilt Req Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 12–1004–01 Out of Tilt Range. Error Out of Tilt range on TILT CMD. Tilt Potentiometer or IMS Potentiometer
2 12–1004–02 Touch Sensor On. Error Gantry Touch Sensor ON was detected during 1. Gantry Touch Sensor; 2. FCV BD or RCV
remote tilt. Bring tilt position back by a few BD
angle to recover.
3 12–1004–03 Already Home Key On Error TILT CMD was received from OC during –
or FWD/BWD Key Home/FWD/BWD is ON.
On.
4 12–0004–04 Home Key On or Error Home/FWD/BWD is pushed during remote–tilt- –
FWD/BWD(COUNT- ing. And Home/FWD/BWD was prioritized as
ER DIRECTION) Key the result.
On.
5 12–0004–05 FWD/BWD(SAME DI- Error Home/FWD/BWD is released during remote– –
RECTION) Key Off. tilting and Home/FWD/BWD was prioritized as
the result.
6 12–1004–06 Interlock or Movement Error Interlock was detected during remote–tilting. Tilt Potentiometer or IMS Potentiometer
Error.
7 12–1004–07 OCTILT Line Off. Error OCTILT line from OC was detected OFF but 1. OC could not send Tilt Stop CMD to TGP in
TILT STOP CMD from OC was not received. time.; 2. OC Keyboard.
8 12–1004–08 Tilt Req TimeOut 68 Error Total tilting time from start tilting to end was Tilt Valve or Tilt Pump
sec. over specified duration.
9 10–0004–09 Undefined Infor. – –
A 10–0004–0A Undefined Infor. – –
B 10–0004–0B Undefined Infor. – –

(continued)

4–12 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–8 Tilt Req Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
C 10–0004–0C Undefined Infor. – –
D 10–0004–0D Undefined Infor. – –
E 10–0004–0E Undefined Infor. – –
F 10–0004–0F Undefined Infor. – –

Table 4–9 Manual Table Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 12–1005–01 Single fault in T/G Error Tilt BWD/FWD movement or Table UP/DWN 1. KEY SW L or R on Gantry Cover may have
movement, Please movement is detected during key switch test the falure and stay ON.; 2. SUB BD
call service. on Gantry initialization.
2 10–0005–02 Undefined Infor. – –
3 10–0005–03 Undefined Infor. – –
4 10–0005–04 Undefined Infor. – –
5 10–0005–05 Undefined Infor. – –
6 12–1005–06 IMS POTENTIO error. Error Unexpected input from IMS Potentiometer dur- IMS Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
ing manual IMS movement. and IMS Potentiometer.
7 12–1005–07 CRADLE POTENTIO Error Unexpected input from Cradle Potentiometer Cradle Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
error. during manual cradle movement. and Cradle Potentiometer.

4–13 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–10 Scan Processor Communication Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 11–1010–01 Nack Detected 3 Error TGP(MP) received the message ’Not Acknowl- TGP or OGP
Times. edged’ from OGP more than 3 times.
2 11–1010–02 Ack/Nack Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive neither ACK nor OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
NACK from OGP. Slip Ring.
3 11–1010–03 SP is not wake up. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
in response to SysConfig CMD. Slip Ring.
4 10–0010–04 Undefined Infor. – –
5 10–0010–05 Undefined Infor. – –
6 10–0010–06 Undefined Infor. – –
7 10–0010–07 Undefined Infor. – –

4–14 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–11 Gantry Processor Communication Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 11–1013–01 Nack Detected 3 Error TGP(MP) received the message ’Not Acknowl- TGP
Times. edged’ from TGP(GP) more than 3 times.
2 11–1013–02 Ack/Nack Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive neither ACK nor TGP
NACK from TGP(GP).
3 11–1013–03 GP is not wake up. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from Gantry Initialization did not complete correctly.;
TGP(GP) in response to SysConfig CMD. 1. TGP; 2. G–Pulse1; 3. Cabling between TGP
and G–Pluse1; 4. Servo Amp or Axial Motor
4 11–0013–04 Undefined Infor. – –
5 11–0013–05 Undefined Infor. – –
6 11–0013–06 Undefined Infor. – –
7 11–0013–07 Undefined Infor. – –

4–15 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–12 Table Processor Communication Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 11–1012–01 Nack Detected 3 Error TGP(MP) received the message ’Not Acknowl- TGP
Times. edged’ from TGP(TP) more than 3 times.
2 11–1012–02 Ack/Nack Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive neither ACK nor TGP
NACK from TGP(TP).
3 11–1012–03 TP is not wakeup. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP
TGP(TP) in response to SysConfig CMD.
4 11–0012–04 Undefined Infor. – –
5 11–0012–05 Undefined Infor. – –
6 11–0012–06 Undefined Infor. – –
7 11–0012–07 Undefined Infor. – –

Table 4–13 TGP Task Time Out Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 11–10F0–01 Scan Mode Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
in response to SCAN CMD. Slip Ring.
2 11–10F0–02 XG Mode Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
in response to XG CMD. Slip Ring.
3 11–10F0–03 Aperture Mode Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
Out. in response to APERTURE CMD. Slip Ring.

(continued)

4–16 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-2 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR EARLIER THAN SYSTEM VERSION 5.5) (continued)

Table 4–14 TGP Task Time Out Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
4 11–10F0–04 Gantry Mode Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP
Out. TGP(GP) in response to GNTRY CMD.
5 11–10F0–05 Cradle Mode Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP
Out. TGP(TP) in response to CRADLE CMD.
6 11–10F0–06 Tilt Mode Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from TGP
TGP(TP) in response to TILT CMD.
7 11–10F0–07 Test Mode Time Out. Error TGP(MP) did not receive any reply from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
in response to TEST MODE CMD. Slip Ring.

Table 4–15 TGP not System

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 11–10F1–01 TGP Not System. Error TGP is not set as System Mode. Set TGP switch(SW1) correctly.

Table 4–16 Safety Loop Open

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 11–10F2–01 SAFETY LOOP Error mA/kV status was not received from OGP dur- JEDI(kV control or CT–IF) or interface be-
OPEN. ing X–ray ON. Or X–ray OFF Status was not tween JEDI and TGP including OGP and Slip
received correctly from OGP. Safety Loop Ring.
was opened by TGP as the result.

4–17 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER)

Table 4–17 Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
01 11–1001–01 Gantry–Transporter Error TGP received SCAN CMD before initializing Scan operation before gantry position initializ-
position is not initial- gantry transporter. Bring gantry transporter ing.
ized. back to out end position.
02 11–1001–02 Table is not CT mode. Error ”TABLE READY” signal from Table is open on Table system is powered off. Angles of Table–
SCAN CMD rotations are not directed to CT. Lateral posi-
tion of Table top is not in center of Gantry–ap-
erture.
03 11–1001–03 Table is moving during Error ”TABLE MOVE” signal from Table is open on Table movement button is pushed or Table
scan. SCAN CMD movement is not locked during CT scanning.
04 11–1001–04 ”STOP CT” signal Error ”STOP CT” signal from the table is open on STOP button of the Table is pushed.
comes from Table on SCAN CMD. Reset the table from Emergen-
scan process. cy Stop status.
05 11–1001–05 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
06 11–1001–06 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
07 11–1001–07 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
08 11–1001–08 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
09 11–1001–09 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
0A 11–1001–0A Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
0B 11–1001–0B Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
0C 11–1001–0C Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
0D 11–1001–0D Interlock X–ray. Error TGP received SCAN CMD while relay(RL1) in 1. Other equipment connected with relay(RL1)
Gantry Rear Switch Box is energized. Unex- is unexpectedly active(H).; 2. Cable connec-
pected door interlock may cause this. tion between RL1 and other equipment(M).
0E 11–1001–0E Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
0F 11–1001–0F Undefined Infor. Undefined Error

4–18 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–18 Helical Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
11 12–1001–11 Cradle Out of Limit. Error Cradle position out of limit on Helical SCAN 1. Cradle Potentiometer; 2. IMS potentiometer
(TP) CMD.
12 12–1001–12 Cradle Unlatch. (TP) Error Cradle unlatch was detected on Helical SCAN 1. Accidental push on Latch Switch.; 2. Cab-
CMD. ling between Latch Switch and TGP including
TBLCON BD and TBL BD.
13 12–1001–13 Cradle Slip. (TP) Error Cradle slip was detected during Helical Scan. 1. Patient movement during Helical Scan or
some obstacles on bottom of cradle or cradle
roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
14 10–0001–14 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
15 12–1001–15 Cradle Start Position Error Cradle start position is out of specification on Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Error. (TP) Helical Scan. Motor
16 12–1001–16 Interval Position Error. Error Cradle Interval is out of specification on Helical 1. Patient movement during Helical Scan or
(TP) Scan. some obstacles on bottom of cradle or cradle
roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
17 12–1001–17 Cradle Move Time Error Cradle acceleration/deceleration time out. Or 1. Patient movement at the beginning of Heli-
Out. (TP) total cradle movement time out on Helical cal Scan.; 2. Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or
Scan. Cradle Stepping Motor
18 12–1001–18 OC Command Error. Error TGP(TP) received unspecified Helical SCAN Take a best guess and good luck.
(TP) CMD from OC.
19 11–1001–19 SCINITREQ Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive SCINTREQ from Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Out. (MP) TGP(TP) on Helical Scan. Motor
1A 11–1001–1A OGP Com Not Ready Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
in 1 sec. (MP) 1sec during Helical SCAN CMD.
1B 11–1001–1B TP Com Not Ready in Error Communication with TGP(TP) is not ready af- TGP
1 sec. (MP) ter 1sec during Helical SCAN CMD.
1C 10–0001–1C Undefined Infor. Undefined Error

(continued)

4–19 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–2 Helical Scan Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1D 12–1001–1D Transporter Servo Error Servo Amp alarm is detected at the transport- Any foreign objects on rails or linear guide,
Alarm detected er. Servo Amp & Motor wiring, Brake is held.
1E 12–1001–1E Over Run Switch or Error Over run limit switch of transporter or Gantry Anything touches on touch sensor during Heli-
Touch Sensor de- Touch Sensor ON was detected during Helical cal scan. Gantry was located to overrun posi-
tected scan. Bring transporter position back by a few tion manually. Any foreign objects on Overrun
distance to recover. sensor.
1F 12–1001–1F Cradle Potentio Error. Error Unexpected input from Cradle Potentiometer Cradle Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
(TP) during Helical Scan. and Cradle Potentiometer.

4–20 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–19 Axial Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
21 11–1001–21 OC Command Error. Error TGP(MP) received unspecified Respiratory Mismatched version between TGP firmware
(MP) SCAN CMD from OC. and OC software.
22 11–1001–22 Gate Pulse Timeout. Error Respiratory Signal Timeout. (Continue H–LEV- TGP,NFIX,CONNECTION BOX, (Respiratory
(MP) EL) Monitor)
23 11–1001–23 Gate Pulse Timeout. Error Respiratory Signal Timeout. (not detect rising TGP,NFIX,CONNECTION BOX, (Respiratory
(MP) edge) Monitor)
24 11–1001–24 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
25 11–1001–25 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
26 11–1001–26 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
27 11–1001–27 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
28 11–1001–28 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
29 11–1001–29 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
2A 11–1001–2A OGP Com Not Ready Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
in 1 sec. (MP) 1sec during Respiratory SCAN CMD.
2B 11–1001–2B Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
2C 11–1001–2C Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
2D 11–1001–2D Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
2E 11–1001–2E Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
24 11–1001–2F Undefined Infor. Undefined Error

4–21 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–20 Scout Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
41 12–1001–41 Cradle Out of Limit. Error Cradle position out of limit on Scout SCAN 1. Cradle Potentiometer; 2. IMS potentiometer
(TP) CMD.
42 12–1001–42 Cradle Unlatch. (TP) Error Cradle unlatch was detected on Scout SCAN 1. Accidental push on Latch Switch.; 2. Cab-
CMD. ling between Latch Switch and TGP including
TBLCON BD and TBL BD.
43 12–1001–43 Cradle Slip. (TP) Error Cradle slip was detected during Scout Scan. 1. Patient movement during Scout Scan or
some obstacles on bottom of cradle or cradle
roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
44 10–0001–44 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
45 12–1001–45 Cradle Start Position Error Cradle start position is out of specification on Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Error. (TP) Scout Scan. Motor
46 12–1001–46 Over Run Switch or Error Over run limit switch of transporter or Gantry Anything touches on touch sensor during
Touch Sensor de- Touch Sensor ON was detected during Scout Scout scan. Gantry was located to overrun
tected scan. Bring transporter position back by a few position manualy. Any foreign objects on Over-
distance to recover. run sensor._-__-_
47 12–1001–47 Cradle Move Time Error Cradle acceleration/deceleration time out. Or Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Out. (TP) total cradle movement time out on Scout Scan. Motor
48 12–1001–48 Transporter Servo Error Servo Amp alarm is detected at the transport- Any foreign objects on rails or linear guide,
Alarm er. Servo Amp & Motor wireing, Brake is held._-_
49 11–1001–49 SCINITREQ Time Error TGP(MP) did not receive SCINTREQ from TGP
Out. (MP) TGP(TP) on Scout Scan.
4A 11–1001–4A OGP Com Not Ready Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
in 1 sec. (MP) 1sec during Scout SCAN CMD.
4B 11–1001–4B TP Com Not Ready in Error Communication with TP is not ready after 1sec TGP
1 sec. (MP) during Scout SCAN CMD.

(continued)

4–22 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–3 Scout Scan Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
4C 11–1001–4C Offset Scan Time Out. Error TGP did not receive OFFSET END from OGP OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
(MP) on Scout Scan. Slip Ring.
4D 10–0001–4D Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
4E 11–1001–4E Scout Scan Time Out. Error TGP did not receive SCAN END from OGP on OGP or TGP/OGP interface which includes
(MP) Scout Scan. Slip Ring.
4F 12–1001–4F Cradle Potentio Error. Error Unexpected input from Cradle Potentiometer Cradle Potentiometer or Cabling between TGP
(TP) during Scout Scan. and Cradle Potentiometer.

4–23 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–21 Fluoro Scan Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
51 10–0001–51 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
52 10–0001–52 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
53 10–0001–53 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
54 10–0001–54 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
55 10–0001–55 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
56 10–0001–56 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
57 10–0001–57 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
58 11–1001–58 XRAY–on timeout. Error mA/kV status was not received from OGP in JEDI(kV control or CT–IF), or interface be-
(MP) response to Fluoro SCAN CMD. tween JEDI and OGP.
59 11–1001–59 XRAY–off timeout. Error mA/kV status from OGP did not stop when JEDI(kV control)
(MP) X–ray Foot SW is off during Fluoro Scan.
5A 11–1001–5A OGP Com is not Error Communication with OGP is not ready after TGP
ready in 1sec. (MP) 1sec during Fluoro SCAN CMD.
5B 10–0001–5B Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
5C 11–1001–5C Fluoro scan command Error Fluoro SCAN CMD is received from OC when NFIX or TGP/NFIX interface
in normal mode. (MP) NFIX is not in Fluoro mode.
5D 11–1001–5D X–SW is not on for Error Fluoro SCAN CMD is received from OC after NFIX or Cabling between TGP and NFIX
1sec before scan X–ray Foot SW is off.
command. (MP)
5E 11–1001–5E Scan command has Error Fluoro SCAN CMD is received while Gantry Take a best guess and good luck.
come while GNTRY button is pushed.
button is pushed .
(MP)
5F 10–0001–5F Undefined Infor. Undefined Error

4–24 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–22 Gantry Req Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 13–1002–01 Gantry Request Com- Error Unspecified GNTRY CMD was received from Mismatched version between TGP firmware
mand Error. (GP) OC. and OC software.
2 13–1002–02 Gantry Set Time Out Error Gantry position or rotation speed is not ready 1. Servo Amp; 2. Axial Motor
in 20 sec. (GP) in 20sec after GNTRY CMD from OC.
3 13–1002–03 Axial Motor Over Error Axial Motor over heat is detected. 1. Axial Motor; 2. SUB BD
Heat. (GP)
4 13–1002–04 Servo Amp Alarm. Error Servo Amp alarm is detected. 1. Too many acceleration/deceleration in short
(GP) duration.; 2. Servo Amp; 3. Axial Motor
5 13–1002–05 Gantry Not System Error Switch of TGP is not set as system mode. Switch of TGP is not set as system mode.
Mode. (GP)
6 13–1002–06 Gantry Rotate Not Error No feedback from Axial motor encoder was 1. Service Switch on SUB BD is set.; 2. 24V
Response. (GP) detected after Gantry rotation request. Power Supply; 3. Servo Amp; 4. Axial Motor;
5. Cabling between Axial Motor and TGP
7 13–1002–07 Gantry Rotate Over Error Gantry rotation speed is over specification. 1. Rotation Speed Adjustment; 2. Servo Amp;
Speed. (GP) 3. TGP
8 13–1002–08 Gantry Rotate Under Error Gantry rotation speed is under specification. 1. Rotation Speed Adjustment; 2. Servo Amp;
Speed. (GP) 3. TGP
9 13–1002–09 Cover Safty SW Error Gantry Cover Switch is open and Axial Motor 1. Alignment between Gantry cover and
Open. (GP) is not powered. Gantry Cover Switch; 2. Gantry Cover Switch
and its cabling to TGP
A 13–1002–0A Dynamic Break On. Error GNTRY CMD was received while Axial Motor Take a best guess and good luck.
(GP) dynamic break working.
B 13–1002–0B Gantry Init Error or Error Gantry was not initialized correctly. Or azi- 1. G–Pulse1(M); 2. TGP; 3. Cabling between
Position Error. (GP) muth counter on TGP is overflow. G–Pulse1 and TGP
C 10–0002–0C Undefined Infor. Undefined Error

(continued)

4–25 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–5 Gantry Req Error (continued)

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
D 10–0002–0D Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
E 11–1002–0E Gantry 130sec(180s Error Gantry continues to rotate over 130sec without 1. Cabling between TGP and OC; 2. OC could
at Smartview) timer is GNTRY CMD nor SCAN CMD from OC. not send GNTRY CMD nor SCAN CMD to
timeout on TGP. (MP) TGP.
F 11–1002–0F Gantry init timeout Error TGP did not receive reply from OGP in re- 1. G–Pulse2; 2. OGP or TGP/OGP interface
ack=100ms rdy=7sec. sponse to Gantry initialize request. which includes Slip Ring.
(MP)

4–26 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–23 Gantry Req Error Code2

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 13–1002–11 Over Current. Error Over Current Error was detected on Servo 1. Servo AMP; 2. Axial Motor
Amp.
2 13–1002–12 Over Load. Error Over Load Error was detected on Servo Amp. 1. Gantry acceleration/deceleration too fre-
quent.; 2. Servo AMP; 3. Axial Motor
3 13–1002–13 Over Speed. Error Over Speed Error was detected on Servo Servo AMP
Amp.
4 10–0002–14 Undefined Infor- Undefined Error
mai-
ton
5 13–1002–15 Abnormal Servo Amp Error Servo Amp. Temperature is out of specifica- Servo AMP
Temparature. tion.
6 13–1002–16 Abnormal Encorder Error Output from Axial Motor Encoder is out of 1. Axial Motor; 2. Servo Amp
specification.
7 13–1002–17 Abnormal Driving Error Driving Power of Servo Amp is out of specifi- 1. Servo AMP; 2. Axial Motor
Power. cation.
8 10–0002–18 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
9 13–1002–19 Abnormal EEPROM. Error Abnormal EEPROM error was detected on 1. Servo AMP
Servo Amp.
A 10–0002–1A Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
B 10–0002–1B Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
C 10–0002–1C Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
D 10–0002–1D Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
E 10–0002–1E Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
F 10–0002–1F Undefined Infor. Undefined Error

4–27 TABLE/GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 15 2202119

4-3 ERRORS DETECTED BY TGP BOARD (FOR SYSTEM VERSION 5.5 OR LATER) (continued)

Table 4–24 Cradle Req Error

Error Code Name Class Description Potential Cause / FRU


Code
1 12–1030–01 Cradle Out of Limit. Error Cradle position out of limit on CRADLE CMD. 1. Cradle Potentiometer; 2. IMS Potentiometer
2 12–1030–02 Cradle Unlatch. Error Cradle unlatch was detected on CRADLE 1. Accidental push on Latch Switch.; 2. Cab-
CMD. ling between Latch Switch and TGP including
TBLCON BD and TBL BD.
3 12–1003–03 Cradle Slip. Error Cradle slip was detected in response to 1. Patient movement during cradle movement
CRADLE CMD. or some obstacles on bottom of cradle or
cradle roller.; 2. Cradle Encoder
4 10–0003–04 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
5 12–1003–05 Out of Scannable Error Scannable range is zero because table posi- 1. Table position is too low. Raise table to
Range. tion is too low. higher position.; 2. Table Height Potentiometer
6 10–0003–06 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
7 12–1003–07 Cradle Move Time Error Cradle acceleration/deceleration time out. Or Cradle Stepping Motor Belt or Cradle Stepping
Out. total cradle movement time out in response to Motor
CRADLE CMD.
8 10–0003–08 Undefined Infor. Undefined Error
9 12–1003–09 ”STOP CT” signal Error ”STOP CT” signal from the table is opening on STOP button of the Table is pushed.
comes from Table dur- Transport–CMD. / Reset the table from
ing transport process Emergency Stop status.
A 12–1003–0A Gantry–Transporter Error TGP received Transport–CMD before initializ- Gantry movement operation from Operator’s
position is not initial- ing gantry transporter. Bring gantry transporter console before gantry position initializating.
ized. back to out end position.
B 12–1003–0B Touch Sensor de- Error Gantry Touch Sensor ON was detected on Touch sensor on gantry or transporter. Any-
tected transport–CMD. Bring transporter position thing touches on touch sensor during Gantry
back by a few distance to recover. moving operation from Operator’s console.

(continued)

4–28 TABLE/GANTRY
CT